616G5
616G5
616G5
Preface
The VARISPEED-616G5 Series of general-purpose Inverters provides V/f control and vector con-
trol as standard features along with user-friendly operation.
i
Safety Information
The following conventions are used to indicate precautions in this manual. Failure to heed precautions provided
in this manual can result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment
and systems.
! WARNING Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or
serious injury.
! CAUTION Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor
injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation.
The warning symbols for ISO and JIS standards are different, as shown below.
ISO JIS
Yaskawa, 1998
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of Yaskawa. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained
herein. Moreover, because Yaskawa is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information
contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation
of this manual. Nevertheless, Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability
assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
ii
Visual Aids
Visual Aids
The following aids are used to indicate certain types of information for easier reference.
iii
General Precautions
D The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show de-
tails. Be sure to restore covers or shields before operating the Units and run the Units ac-
cording to the instructions described in this manual.
D Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples
only and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable.
D The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation
of the manual may be changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.
D When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa rep-
resentatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on
the front cover.
D If nameplates become warn or damaged, order new ones from your Yaskawa representa-
tives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
iv
How to Change the Digital Operator Display from Japanese to English
Safety Precautions
CAUTION
Page
D Never install an Inverter that is damaged or missing components. 2-2
Doing so can result in injury.
J Installation
CAUTION
Page
D Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter. 2-6
If the Inverter is held by the front cover, the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly result-
ing in injury.
D Attach the Inverter to a metal or other noncombustible material. 2-6
Fire can result if the Inverter is attached to a combustible material.
D Install a cooling fan or other cooling device when installing more than one Inverter in 2-6
the same enclosure so that the temperature of the air entering the Inverters is below
45_C.
Overheating can result in fires or other accidents.
J Wiring
WARNING
Page
D Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals. 3-2
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
D Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work. 3-2
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
D Be sure to ground the ground terminal. 3-2
(200 V class: Ground to 100 or less, 400 V class: Ground to 10 or less)
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
D Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired. 3-2
Otherwise, there is the possibility of injury. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.)
D Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to 3-2
come into contact with the Inverter case. Never short the output circuits.
Otherwise, electrical shock or grounding can occur.
CAUTION
Page
D Check to be sure that the voltage of the main AC power supply satisfies the rated 3-2
voltage of the Inverter.
Injury or fire can occur if the voltage is not correct.
D Do not perform voltage withstand tests on the Inverter. 3-2
Otherwise, semiconductor elements and other devices can be damaged.
D Connect braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units as shown in the 3-2
I/O wiring examples.
Otherwise, a fire can occur.
D Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. 3-2
Otherwise, a fire may occur.
v
CAUTION
Page
D Do not connect AC power to output terminals U, V, and W. 3-2
The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals.
D Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output cir- 3-2
cuits.
The Inverter can be damaged or internal parts burnt if these devices are connected.
D Do not connect electromagnetic switches or contactors to the output circuits. 3-2
If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the overcurrent
protection circuit inside the Inverter to operate.
CAUTION
Page
D Disconnect the load (machine, device) from the motor before autotuning. 4 - 29
The motor may turn, possibly resulting in injury or damage to equipment. Also, motor
constants cannot be correctly set with the motor attached to a load.
J Trial Operation
WARNING
Page
D Check to be sure that the front cover is attached before turning ON the power supply. 5-2
Do not remove the front cover during operation.
An electric shock may occur.
D Do not come close to the machine when the fault reset function is used. If the alarmed 5-2
is cleared, the machine may start moving suddenly.
Also, design the machine so that human safety is ensured even when it is restarted.
Injury may occur.
D Provide a separate emergency stop switch; the Digital Operator STOP Key is valid 5-2
only when its function is set.
Injury may occur.
D Reset alarms only after confirming that the RUN signal is OFF. If an alarm is reset with 5-2
the RUN signal turned ON, the machine may suddenly start.
Injury may occur.
CAUTION
Page
D Dont touch the radiation fins (heat sink), braking resistor, or Braking Resistor Unit. 5-2
These can become very hot.
Otherwise, a burn injury may occur.
D Be sure that the motor and machine is within the applicable ranges before starting 5-2
operation.
Otherwise, an injury may occur.
D Provide a separate holding brake if necessary. 5-2
Always construct the external sequence to confirm that the holding brake is activated
in the event of an emergency, a power failure, or an abnormality in the inverter occur-
ing.
Failure to observe this caution can result in personal injury.
D If using with an elevator, take safety measures on the machines side to prevent the 5-2
elevator from dropping.
Failure to observe this caution can result in personal injury.
vi
How to Change the Digital Operator Display from Japanese to English
CAUTION
D Dont check signals while the Inverter is running. 5-2
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
D Be careful when changing Inverter settings. The Inverter is factory set to suitable set- 5-2
tings.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged. You must, however, you must set the power sup-
ply voltage jumper for 400 V class Inverters of 18.5 kW or higher (see 5.2.4).
WARNING
Page
D Do not touch the Inverter terminals. Some of the terminals carry high voltages and 10 - 2
are extremely dangerous.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
D Always have the protective cover in place when power is being supplied to the Invert- 10 - 2
er. When attaching the cover, always turn OFF power to the Inverter through the
MCCB.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
D After turning OFF the main circuit power supply, wait until the CHARGE indicator light 10 - 2
goes out before performance maintenance or inspections.
The capacitor will remain charged and is dangerous.
D Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by au- 10 - 2
thorized personnel.
Remove all metal objects, such as watches and rings, before starting work. Always
use grounded tools.
Failure to heed these warning can result in electric shock.
CAUTION
Page
D A CMOS IC is used in the control board. Handle the control board and CMOS IC care- 10 - 2
fully. The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
D Do not change the wiring, or remove connectors or the Digital Operator, during op- 10 - 2
eration.
Doing so can result in personal injury.
J Other
WARNING
D Do not attempt to modify or alter the Inverter.
Doing so can result in electrical shock or injury.
vii
Warning Label Contents and Position
There is a warning label on the Inverter in the position shown in the following illustration. Always heed the warn-
ings given on this label.
Warning label
position
viii
How to Change the Digital Operator Display from Japanese to English
If the Digital Operator displays messages in Japanese, change to the English mode using the follow-
ing steps.
ix
Before Reading This Manual
This manual explains both the conventional VS-616G5 Inverters and the
G5-series Inverters for SPEC:F.
The shaded sections or those specified as being for SPEC:F apply only to
G5-series Inverters for SPEC:F ( Inverters with revised version letters of F or
later.)
x
CONTENTS
11 Introduction 1
12 Handling Inverters 2
13 Wiring 3
15 Trial Operation 5
16 Basic Operation 6
17 Advanced Operation 7
18 User Constants 8
19 Troubleshooting 9
11 Specifications 11
12 Appendix 12
xi
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
1.1 Outline and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.1 VS-616G5 Inverter Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.2 Outline of Control Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.1.3 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
2 Handling Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
2.1 Confirmations upon Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1 Nameplate Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
3.1 Connections to Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3 Terminal Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.4 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4.1 Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4.2 Main Circuit Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.4.3 Main Circuit Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
3.4.4 Standard Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
3.4.5 Wiring the Main Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13
xiii
4 Setting User Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
4.1 Using the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.1 Inverter Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.2 Switching Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.3 User Constant Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.4 Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
4.2.5 Initialize Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18
4.2.6 Programming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25
4.2.7 Autotuning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 29
4.2.8 Modified Constants Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 31
5 Trial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
5.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2 Trial Operation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.1 Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.2 Checking the Display Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.3 Initializing Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.4 Setting Input Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.5 Autotuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.6 No-load Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.7 Loaded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
6 Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
6.1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.1 Setting the Access Level and Control Method: A1-01, A1-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.2 Frequency Reference Settings: b1-01, H3-01, H3-08, H3-09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.1.3 Frequency Reference from Digital Operator: b1-01, o1-03, d1-01 to d1-09 . . . 6-7
6.1.4 Run Source and Sequence Input Responsiveness: b1-02, b1-06, b1-07 . . . . . 6-9
6.1.5 Acceleration/Deceleration Times: C1-01 through C1-08, C1-09, C1-10, C1-11 6 - 10
6.1.6 Prohibiting Reverse Operation: b1-04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11
6.1.7 Selecting the Stopping Method: b1-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
6.1.8 Multi-function Input Settings: H1-01 through H1-06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
xiv
Table of Contents
7 Advanced Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
7.1 Open-loop Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1 Torque Limit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.1.2 Adjusting Speed Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.1.3 Setting/Adjusting Motor Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.1.4 Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.1.5 Starting Torque Compensation Function (for SPEC:F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
8 User Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
8.1 Initialize Mode Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.2 Programming Mode Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.2.1 Application Constants: b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.2.2 Autotuning Constants: C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
8.2.3 Reference Constants: d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
8.2.4 Motor Constant Constants: E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 20
8.2.5 Options Constants: F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 24
8.2.6 Terminal Constants: H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28
8.2.7 Protection Constants: L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 35
8.2.8 Operator Constants: o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
8.2.9 Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45
8.2.10 Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 47
9 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
9.1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.1 Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.2 Minor Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.1.3 Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
xv
9.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.2.1 If Constant Constants Cannot Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.2.2 If the Motor Does Not Operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.2.3 If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11
9.2.4 If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11
9.2.5 If the Motor Does Not Operate According to Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11
9.2.6 If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11
9.2.7 If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Open-loop
Vector Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11
9.2.8 If Motor Deceleration is Slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12
9.2.9 If the Motor Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12
9.2.10 If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio . . . . . . . 9 - 13
9.2.11 If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run . . . . . . . . . 9 - 13
9.2.12 If There is Mechanical Oscillation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 13
9.2.13 If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14
9.2.14 If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14
9.2.15 If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14
11 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
11.1 Standard Inverter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 2
11.2 Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 5
12 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
12.1 Inverter Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 2
12.1.1 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 2
12.1.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 2
12.1.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 3
12.1.4 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 3
xvi
1 1
Introduction
1-1
Introduction
1.1.1 VS-616G5 Inverter Models
1-2
1.1 Outline and Functions
1-3
Introduction
1.1.2 Outline of Control Methods
1.1.3 Functions
J Autotuning
Autotuning is effective for vector control. It solves problems in applicable motor restrictions and difficult
constant settings. The motor constants are automatically set by entering a value from the motors rating
nameplate.
Autotuning allows flux vector control to operate accurately with virtually any normal AC induction motor,
regardless of the supplier.
Always autotune the motor separately before operating using vector control. Refer to 5.2.5 Autotuning and
6.4.3 Autotuning for details.
J Torque Control
Torque control is effective for flux vector control with PG. Torque is controlled by taking multi-function
analog input signals as torque references. Torque control accuracy is 5%. Switching is possible between
torque control and speed control.
J V/f Pattern Settings
V/f pattern settings are effective for V/f control. Select a V/f pattern according to the application from
among the 15 preset V/f patterns. Custom V/f patterns can also be set.
J Frequency References
The following five types of frequency references can be used to control the output frequency of the Invert-
er.
D Numeric input from the Digital Operator
D Voltage input within a range from 0 to 10 V
D Voltage input within a range from 0 to 10 V (with negative voltages, rotation is in the opposite direc-
tion from the run command.)
1-4
1.1 Outline and Functions
1-5
Introduction
1.1.3 Functions
1 Operation:
Initialize:
For operating the Inverter. (All kinds of monitoring are possible.)
For selecting the language displayed at the Digital Operator, set-
ting access levels, initialization, and the control modes.
Programming: For setting user constants for operation.
Autotuning: For automatic calculation or setting motor constants. (Only under
the vector control mode.)
Modified constants: For referencing or changing user constants after shipping.
Groups Classified by application.
Functions Classified by function. (See user constants.)
Constants Individual user constant settings.
The VS-616G5 allows the following three access levels to be set in order to further simplify setting user
constants. (An access level is a range of user constants that can be referenced or set.)
Quick-Start Reads/sets user constants required for trial operation. [Factory setting]
Basic Reads/sets user constants that are commonly used.
Advanced Reads/sets all the user constants that can be used.
In general, press the DATA/ENTER Key to move from an upper to a lower level. This varies somewhat,
however, according to the access level, as shown in Fig. 1.1. For the Quick-Start access level, which has
few user constants that can be set, pressing the DATA/ENTER Key jumps directly to the user constant lev-
el; whereas for the Advanced access level, which has many user constants, pressing the DATA/ENTER
Key first leads to the Group level.
Initialize mode
DATA
Programming mode ENTER
Constant to be changed
1-6
1.2 Nomenclature
1.2 Nomenclature
This section provides the names of VS-616G5 components, and the components and functions of the Digital
Operator.
Mounting hole 1
Front cover
Digital Operator
JVOP-130
Die-cast case
A 200 V Class Inverter with 0.4 kW Output is shown below with the front cover removed.
Control circuit
terminals
11 12(G) 13 14 15 16 17 25 26 27 33 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 9 10
R S T U V W/T3
1 2 B1 B2 T2
L1 L2 L3 T1
Main circuit
Power input Braking Resistor Motor output terminals
CHARGE
1-7
Introduction
1.2.2 Digital Operator Components
D G TAL OPERATOR
JVOP 130
Da a D sp ay
Two ne LCD ha d sp ays da a o mon o ng
use cons an s and se va ues w h 16 cha ac e s
pe ne
LOCAL
MENU ESC
REMOTE
DATA
JOG
ENTER
Keys
FWD
REV RESET Execu e ope a ons such as se ng use cons an s
mon o ng ogg ng and au o un ng
RUN STOP
1-8
1.2 Nomenclature
FWD Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the VS-616G5
FWD/REV Key
REV is being operated from the Digital Operator.
Sets the number of digits for user constant settings.
RESET Key
RESET Also acts as the reset key when a fault has occurred.
DATA Enters menu items, functions, constants, and set values after
DATA/ENTER Key
ENTER they are set.
Note Except in diagrams, keys are referred to using the key names listed in the above table.
STOP
: : :
Lit Blinking Not lit
The RUN and STOP indicators light and blink to indicate operating status.
During DB (initial excitation), RUN blinks and STOP is turned ON.
1-9
2
Handling Inverters 2
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving a VS-616G5 In-
verter and describes installation methods.
2-1
Handling Inverters
2.1.1 Nameplate Information
CAUTION
D Never install an Inverter that is damaged or missing components.
Doing so can result in injury.
2 Is the Inverter damaged in any way? Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or
other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
loose?
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or
your Yaskawa representative immediately.
J Example Nameplate
Standard domestic (Japan) Inverter: 3-phase, 200 VAC, 0.4 kW, IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 standards
CIMR - G5 A 2 0P4
Inverter
VS-616G5
2-2
2.1 Confirmations upon Delivery
J Inverter Specifications
2 0P4 1 F
No. Voltage Class Version (Enter the specifications
2 AC input, 3-phase, 200 V form number when special spec-
4 AC input, 3-phase, 400 V ifications are required.)
D DC input, 3-phase, 200 V
E DC input, 3-phase, 400 V
2-3
Handling Inverters
H1
H
W1
H2
W D
4-d
W1
W D
4-d
W4
W5 W6 Max. Applicable Motor
Capacity W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6
[kW]
185, 220 750 440 310 850 285 565
300 750 440 310 873 298 575
W2 W3
W1
2-4
2.2 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Table 2.2 VS-616G5 External Dimensions (mm) and Approx. Masses (kg)
Max. Ap- Open Chassis (IP00) Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA1)
Volt-
Volt plicable DC
age Motor Out- Mounting Reac-
W H D W1 H1 H2 Approx. W H D W1 H1 H2 Approx.
class put Holes tor*1
Mass Mass
[kW] d *1
0.4
0.75 140 280 160 126 266 7.0 3 140 280 160 126 266 7.0 3 M5
1.5
2.2
140 280 180 126 266 70
7.0 45
4.5 140 280 180 126 266 70
7.0 45
4.5 M5 Op-
3.7
tion
5.5 5.5 5.5
200 300 205 186 285 80
8.0 200 300 205 186 285 80
8.0 M6
7.5
2
6 6
2-5
Handling Inverters
2.3.1 Installation Site
CAUTION
D Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter.
If the Inverter is held by the front cover, the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly resulting in injury.
D Attach the Inverter to a metal or other noncombustible material.
Fire can result if the Inverter is attached to a combustible material.
D Install a cooling fan or other cooling device when installing more than one Inverter in the same
enclosure so that the temperature of the air entering the Inverters is below 45_C.
Overheating can result in fires or other accidents.
Install the VS-616G5 in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
2 2.3.1 Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions.
Type Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity
Enclosed wall- 10 to 40_C 90% RH or less (no condensation)
mounted
Open chassis 10 to 45_C 90% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers
before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 15 kW or less in a panel.
D Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed
panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
D When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or
other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
D Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
D Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
D Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
D Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
D Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
D Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
2.3.2 Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from ex-
treme temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a
cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45C.
2-6
2.4 Installation Orientation and Space
50 mm min. Air
120 mm min.
IMPORTANT S The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both open chassis (IP00) and enclosed
wall-mounted (IP20, NEMA 1) Inverters.
S Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output
of 15 kW or less in a panel.
S Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a
200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 30 kW or more in a panel.
2-7
Handling Inverters
2.5.1 Inverters of 15 kW or Less
2 2
Front cover
Digital
Operator 1
Front cover
1
2
2-8
2.5 Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Digital
Operator
2
1
Front cover
A
2
B
IMPORTANT 1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than
those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect
contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front
cover.
2-9
3
Wiring
3
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections,
main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and
control circuit wiring specifications.
3-1
Wiring
WARNING
D Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
D Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
D Be sure to ground the ground terminal.
(200 V class: Ground to 100 or less, 400 V class: Ground to 10 or less)
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
D Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired.
Otherwise, there is the possibility of injury. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.)
D Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into
contact with the Inverter case. Never short the output circuits.
Otherwise, electrical shock or grounding can occur.
CAUTION
3 D Check to be sure that the voltage of the main AC power supply satisfies the rated voltage of the
Inverter.
Injury or fire can occur if the voltage is not correct.
D Do not perform voltage withstand tests on the Inverter.
Otherwise, semiconductor elements and other devices can be damaged.
D Connect braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units as shown in the I/O wiring
examples.
Otherwise, a fire can occur.
D Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Otherwise, a fire may occur.
D Do not connect AC power to output terminals U, V, and W.
The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals.
D Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits.
The Inverter can be damaged or internal parts burnt if these devices are connected.
D Do not connect electromagnetic switches or contactors to the output circuits.
If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the overcurrent protection
circuit inside the Inverter to operate.
3-2
3.1 Connections to Peripheral Devices
Power supply
Molded-case circuit
breaker or ground
fault interrupter
Magnetic con-
tactor
3
AC reactor for power
factor improvement
VS-616G5
Motor
Ground
3-3
Wiring
Short-circuit bar
1 2 B1 B2
MCCB
3
(reverse when closed)
External fault 23
3
Analog
Fault reset monitor 2 + Multi-function analog output
4
Multi-step speed setting 1 10 to 10 V
(Master/auxiliary switch) AM
Factory- (Default: Output current
5 Multi-function contact 5 V/Inverter rated current)
preset Multi-step speed setting 2 inputs
functions
6
Jog frequency reference
21
7 Multi-function analog output
External baseblock command Analog 10 to10 V
monitor 1 22
8 FM + (Default: Output frequency
0 to 10 V/100% frequency)
11 Sequence common
(Insulated from 0 V (12)
terminal)
12 Shield terminal
18
2k
19 Fault contact output
15 Frequency setting power 250 VAC, 1 A max.
15 V, 20 mA 30 VDC, 1 A max.
0 to 10 V 13 Master speed reference 20
2 k 10 to 10 V (20 k )
External
frequency 4 to 20 mA P (Default: 0 to 10 V/100%)
references 14 Master speed reference
9 Multi-function contact output
P 4 to 20 mA (250 )
0 to 10 V 250 VAC, 1 A max.
16 Multi-function analog input
10 30 VDC, 1 A max.
P (10 to 10 V (20 k )
0V 17 (Default: Auxiliary frequency (Default: Running signal)
reference
0 to 10 V/100%)
0V
33 25 Open collector 1
Frequency setting (Default: Zero speed
power: signal)
15 V, 20 mA
26 Open collector 2 Multi-function
(Default: Speed open-collector
agree signal) output
48 V , 50 mA
27 max.
Multi-function output
common
* Shield
* Twisted-pair wires
3-4
3.3 Terminal Block Configuration
IMPORTANT 1. Control circuit terminals 1 to 33 are not arranged in order of terminal numbers; they are arranged as shown
below. Be sure to wire them correctly.
11 12(G) 13 14 15 16 17 25 26 27 33 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 9 10
Control circuit
terminals
11 12(G) 13 14 15 16 17 25 26 27 33 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 9 10
R S T U V W/T3
1 2 B1 B2 T2
L1 L2 L3 T1
Main circuit
Power input Braking resistor Motor output terminals
CHARGE
3-5
Wiring
3.4.1 Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
3-6
3.4 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
R, S, T, , 1 , 2, B1, B2, U, V, W
G5A47P5 M5 55
5.5
R, S, T, , 1 , 2, B1, B2, U, V, W M5 8 to 14
G5A4011 M6 8
R, S, T, , 1 , 2, B1, B2, U, V, W M5 8 to 14
G5A4015
R, S, T, , 1 , 2, 3, U, V, W
M6
M6
8
14
3
G5A4018 M8 8
r, M4 0.5 to 5.5
R, S, T, , 1 , 2, 3, U, V, W M6 22
G5A4022 M8 8
r, M4 0.5 to 5.5
R, S, T, , 1 , 2, 3, U, V, W 22
M8
G5A4030 8
r, M4 0.5 to 5.5
R, S, T, , 1 , 2, 3, U, V, W 30
M8
G5A4037 14
Main
M i r, M4 0.5 to 5.5 Power cables,
P bl e.g., 600 V vinyl
i l pow-
Circuits R, S, T, , 1 , 2, 3, U, V, W 50
er cables
M8
G5A4045 14
r, M4 0.5 to 5.5
R, S, T, U, V, W M10 38 to 100
,3 M8
G5A4055 M8 22
r , 200, 400 M4 0.5 to 5.5
R, S, T, U, V, W M10 38 to 100
,3 M8
G5A4075 M8 22
r , 200, 400 M4 0.5 to 5.5
R, S, T, U, V, W M10 60 to 100
,3 M8
G5A4110 M8 30
r , 200, 400 M4 0.5 to 5.5
R, S, T, U, V, W M12 100 to 200
,3 M8
G5A4160 M8 50
r , 200, 400 M4 0.5 to 5.5
R, S, T, , 1 , 3, U, V, W M16 250 to 325
G5A4185 M8 50
r , 200, 400 M4 0.5 to 5.5
R, S, T, , 1 , 3, U, V, W M16 325 or 200 2P
G5A4220 M8 60
r , 200, 400 M4 0.5 to 5.5
250 2P or 325
R, S, T, , 1 , 3, U, V, W M16
2P
G5A4300 M8 60
r , 200, 400 M4 0.5 to 5.5
Control
All models 1 to 33 M3.5 0.5 to 2 Shielded twisted-pair wires
Circuits
Note The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75C.
3-7
Wiring
3.4.1 Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Table 3.3 Closed-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C 2805) (For 200 V/400 V Classes)
Wire Thickness mm2 Terminal Screws Size
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
05
0.5
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
0 75
0.75
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
1 25
1.25
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 2 to 3.5
M4 2 to 4
2 M5 2 to 5
M6 2 to 6
M8 2 to 8
M4 5.5 to 4
3 3 5/5 5
3.5/5.5
M5
M6
5.5 to 5
5.5 to 6
M8 5.5 to 8
M5 8 to 5
8 M6 8 to 6
M8 8 to 8
M6 14 to 6
14
M8 14 to 8
M6 22 to 6
22
M8 22 to 8
30/38 M8 38 to 8
M8 60 to 8
50/60
M10 60 to 10
80 80 to 10
M10
100 100 to 10
100 100 to 12
150 M12 150 to 12
200 200 to 12
M12 2 325 to 12
325
M16 325 to 16
IMPORTANT Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage.
Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:
(If there is the possibility of excessive voltage drop, use a larger wire suitable to the required length.)
Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 103
3-8
3.4 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
3-9
Wiring
3.4.3 Main Circuit Configurations
J 200 V Class
CIMR-G5A20P4 to 21P5 (0.4 to 1.5 kW) CIMR-G5A22P2 to 27P5 (2.2 to 7.5 kW)
B1 B2 B1 B2
*1 1 *1 1
2 2
(DCL (DCL
R(L1) U(T1) option) R(L1) U(T1)
option)
S(L2) + V(T2) S(L2) + V(T2)
*2 *2
T(L3) W(T3) T(L3) W(T3)
Power Control Power Control
supply circuits supply circuits
(RCC) (RCC)
Fin cooling fan
3
CIMR-G5A2011 to 2015 (11, 15 kW) CIMR-G5A2018 to 2022 (18.5, 22 kW)
3 3
*1 1 1
2 *1 2
(DCL U(T1)
option) R(L1) R U
S(L2) V(T2) S V
*2 + *3 +
T(L3) W(T3) T W
Power r Power
Control supply
supply circuits
(RCC) (RCC)
Fin cool- Control
Fin cooling fan ing fan Internal circuits
cooling fan
R U
S V U
*1 +
T W + V
W
r
Power
supply
(RCC) Control Power sup- Control
Internal circuits ply (RCC) circuits
Fin cooling fan
cooling fan r Fin cooling fan
3 - 10
3.4 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
J 400 V Class
CIMR-G5A40P4 to 41P5 (0.4 to 1.5 kW) CIMR-G5A42P2 to 43P7 (2.2 to 3.7 kW)
B1 B2 B1 B2
*1 1 *1 1
2 2
(DCL (DCL
R(L1) U(T1) R(L1) U(T1)
option) option)
S(L2) + V(T2) S(L2) + V(T2)
*2 *2
T(L3) W(T3) T(L3) W(T3)
Power Control Power Control
supply circuits supply circuits
(RCC) (RCC)
Fin cooling fan
Power r
Control Control
supply circuits circuits
(RCC) Fin cooling fan Power
Fin cooling fan supply Internal
(RCC) cooling fan
CIMR-G5A4055 to 4160 (55 to 160 kW) CIMR-G5A4185 to 4300 (185 to 300 kW)
3 3
1
R U R U
S + V S V
*1 *3 +
T W T W
r r
Power Power
200 supply 200 supply
400 (RCC) Control (RCC) Control
400
Internal circuits circuits
Fin cooling fan Fin cooling fan
cooling fan
U
+ V
Control
circuits
Power sup-
ply (RCC)
r
200 400 Fin cool-
ing fan
3 - 11
Wiring
3.4.4 Standard Connection Diagrams
1 2 B1 B2 1 2 3
U
R R U
S V IM V IM
S
T W T W
3-phase 200 VAC 3-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC)
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before
connecting a DC reactor. connecting a DC reactor.
1 2 3 3
R U R U
S V IM S V IM
T W T W
3-phase 200 VAC 3-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC) r r *1
*2 *2
1
R 3 R 3
S U S U
V IM T V IM
T
3-phase 400 VAC 3-phase 400 VAC W
r *1 W r *1
200 200
400 *2 400 *2
* 1 Input the control circuit power supply from r for 200 V class Inverters of 30 to 75 kW (B2030 to B2075) and
from r- 400 for 400 V class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW (B4055 to B4300). (For other models, the control power
supply is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply.)
* 2 The rR, ( 400)-S terminals are short-circuited for shipping. Remove the short wiring from the 2018, 2022,
4018 to 4045 and 4185 to 4300 when supplying power to the main circuits from the DC power supply.
3 - 12
3.4 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
3 - 13
Wiring
3.4.5 Wiring the Main Circuits
Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or the phase advancing
capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the con-
verter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC
reactor connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Power
supply MCCB
Noise
filter VS-616G5 IM
MCCB
Other
controllers
Use a special-purpose noise filter for In-
verters.
D Wiring Example 2
Power MCCB
supply
VS-616G5 IM
MCCB
General- Other
purpose controllers
noise filter
Power
MCCB
supply
General-
purpose IM
noise filter
VS-616G5
MCCB
Other
controllers
Do not use general-purpose noise filters. No gen-
eral-purpose noise filter can effectively suppress
noise generated from the Inverter.
3 - 14
3.4 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Radio noise
Induc-
tive
AM radio
Signal noise
line
Controller
Inductive Noise: Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the control-
ler to malfunction.
Radio Noise: Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio
receiver to make noise.
Fig 3.10 Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side
30 cm min.
Signal line
Controller
3 - 15
Wiring
3.4.5 Wiring the Main Circuits
J Ground Wiring
D Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 and
that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 .
D Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
D Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and mini-
mize the length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode
and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unsta-
ble.
D When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
OK
OK
NO!
3 - 16
3.4 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
B1
J Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB) and Braking Unit (CDBR)
Connect the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit to the Inverter as shown in the Figure 3.15.
L8-01 (Overheat protection of braking
0 (Disables overheat protection)
resistor)
0 (Disables stall prevention function)
L3-04 (Stall prevention during decelera-
tion)
(Select either one of them.) 3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking
resistor)
Set L8-01 to 1 before operating the Inverter with the braking resistor without thermal overload relay trip
contacts.
The Braking Resistor Unit cannot be used and the deceleration time cannot be shortened by the Inverter
if L3-04 is set to 1 (i.e., if stall prevention is enabled for deceleration).
To prevent the Unit from overheating, design the sequence to turn OFF the power supply for the thermal
overload relay trip contacts of the Unit as shown in Figure 3.15.
B1 P 1
3 - 17
Wiring
3.4.5 Wiring the Main Circuits
3 0 P 1
Thermal protector
VS-616G5 trip contact
0 B 2
3 4
Thermal overload
relay trip contact
Fig 3.15 Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit
3 - 18
3.4 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
detector
VS-616G5
Level
SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE
+15 5
1
2 6
P
1
2
Braking Unit #2
5
6
1
P
2
Braking Unit #3
5
6
3
Braking Unit #1 3 4 3 4 3 4
Cooling fin overheating Cooling fin overheating Cooling fin overheating
contacts (thermoswitch contacts (thermoswitch contacts (thermoswitch
contacts) contacts) contacts)
MCCB
MC
Three-phase power:
R R (L1)
200 to 230 V, 50/60 Hz
or S (L2)
S
380 to 460 V, 50/60 Hz
T T (L3)
* 400/200 V
THRX OFF ON MC
MC
SA
Overload relay trip contact VS-616G5
of Braking Resistor Unit
THRX
1 2
SA
MC TRX
SA
TRX
20 18
Fault contacts
* Use a transformer with 200 and 400 V outputs for the power supply of the
400 V Inverter.
3 - 19
Wiring
3.5.1 Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Table 3.7 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Terminal Wire Thickness
Terminals Wire Type
Screws [mm2]
Stranded wire: 0.5 to
1 to 11, 13 to 33 M3.5 1.25 S Shielded, twisted-pair wire
Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25 S Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath
cable
12 (G) M3.5 0.5 to 2
The closed-loop connectors and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in Table 3.8.
3 - 20
3.5 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
* When driving an L load, such as a relay coil, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Figure 3.18.
Flywheel diode
3 - 21
Wiring
3.5.3 Control Circuit Terminal Connections (All Models)
11 12(G) 13 14 15 16 17 25 26 27 33 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 9 10
Forward run/stop 18
1 Fault output (NO)
Reverse run/stop 19
2 Fault output (NC)
Multi-function contact input 1
20
3 (External fault) Fault output common
Multi-function contact input 2
4 (Fault reset)
3 Multi-function contact input 3
5 (Multi-step speed
9
Multi-function contact output
reference 1) (Running signal)
Multi-function contact input 4
10
6 (Multi-step speed ref- Multi-function contact
erence 2) output common
Multi-function contact input 5
7 (Jog frequency reference)
Multi-function contact input 6
25
8 (External baseblock) Multi-function output 1
(Zero speed signal)
Sequence input common
11
26
12 (G) Multi-function output 2
(Speed agree signal)
27
15 Multi-function output common
Frequency reference
power supply +15 V
Frequency reference 33
power supply 15 V
Frequency reference 21 Multi-function analog
input (voltage) 13 output 1
Frequency reference Voltmeter
FM (Output frequency)
input (current)
14
Multi-function analog
Multi-function analog output 2
input 23
16 (Auxiliary frequen-
Frequency reference cy reference) AM Voltmeter (Out-
input common 22 put current)
17
Multi-function analog
output common
3 - 22
3.6 Wiring Check
3 - 23
Wiring
3.7.1 Installing a PG Speed Control Card
Spacer mounting
(b)
Connection (a)
terminals
Bottom
Ground terminal 12
Enlargement
[Front] [Side]
3 - 24
3.7 Installing and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards
3 - 25
Wiring
3.7.2 PG Speed Control Card Terminal Blocks
3 - 26
3.7 Installing and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards
S V IM PG
T W
PG-A2
+12 V power supply
1
0 V power supply
4CN 4CN 2
3
4
TA1 12 V voltage output (A/B phase)
5
Pulse 0 V
3
6
12 E
7
Pulse monitor output
TA2 (E) 8
S V IM PG
T W
PG-A2
+12 V power supply
1
0 V power supply
4CN 2
4CN
3
4
TA1 Open collector output (A/B phase)
5
Pulse 0 V
6
E
12 7
Pulse monitor output
TA2 (E) 8
3 - 27
Wiring
3.7.3 Wiring a PG Speed Control Card
1k 1k
3
Short for
+12 V
open-col-
lector input 0V 7
4 +12 V
2k 2k Pulse
5 monitor
output
Pulse 8
3k
input 6 0V
3.9 k TA1
0V
3 - 28
3.7 Installing and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards
S V IM PG
T W
PG-B2
Power supply +12 V
TA1 1
Power supply 0 V
4CN 2
4CN
A-phase pulse output (+)
3
A-phase pulse output ()
4
B-phase pulse output (+)
5
B-phase pulse output ()
6
TA2 1
A-phase pulse monitor output
2
12 E
3
TA3 (E) 4
B-phase pulse monitor output
3
A-phase
D When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG pulses
that has an output impedance with a current of at least 12 mA to the
B-phase
input circuit photocoupler (diode).
pulses
D The pulse monitor dividing ratio can be changed using constant
F1-06.
3 - 29
Wiring
3.7.3 Wiring a PG Speed Control Card
S V IM PG
T W
PG-D2
6
12 E
7
TA2 (E) Pulse monitor output
8
S V IM PG
T W
PG-X2
10
3 - 30
3.7 Installing and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards
d1
8 mm
14 mm
d2
IMPORTANT Do not solder wires with the control circuit terminals if wires are used instead of solderless terminals.
Wires may not contact well with the control circuit terminals or the wires may be disconnected from the con-
trol circuit terminals due to oscillation if the wires are soldered.
3 - 31
Wiring
3.7.4 Wiring PG Speed Control Card Terminal Blocks
J Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.
3 Thin-slot screwdriver Blade of screwdriver
Control circuit
terminal block
3 - 32
3.7 Installing and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards
PG power supply
Signals
J PG-D2/PG-X2
There are 5 V and 12 V PG power supplies.
Check the PG power supply specifications before connecting.
The maximum response frequency is 300 kHz.
Use the following equation to computer the output frequency of the PG (fPG).
PG power
0 V 12V
3 - 33
4
Setting User Constants
This chapter describes setting user constants using the Digital Operator.
4-1
Setting User Constants
D G TAL OPERATOR
JVOP 130
Da a D sp ay
Two ne LCD ha d sp ays da a o mon o ng
use cons an s and se va ues w h 16 cha ac e s
pe ne
4 LOCAL
REMOTE
MENU ESC
DATA
JOG
ENTER
Keys
FWD
REV RESET Execu e ope a ons such as se ng use cons an s
mon o ng JOG and au o un ng
RUN STOP
4-2
4.1 Using the Digital Operator
FWD Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the VS-616G5
FWD/REV Key
REV is being operated from the Digital Operator.
Sets the number of digits for user constant settings.
RESET Key
RESET Also acts as the reset Key when a fault has occurred.
DATA
DATA/ENTER Key
Enters menu items, functions, constants, and set values after 4
ENTER they are set.
Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table.
STOP
: : :
Lit Blinking Not lit
The RUN and STOP indicators light and blink to indicate operating status.
During DB (initial excitation), RUN blinks and STOP is turned ON.
4-3
Setting User Constants
4.2.1 Inverter Modes
4.2 Modes
This section describes the VS-616G5s monitor modes, switching between modes, and accessing/setting user
constants.
Note Always perform autotuning before operating in vector control mode. Refer to5.2.5 Auto-
tuning and 6.4.3 Autotuning for details.
4-4
4.2 Modes
All modes/constant
Power ON
status
MENU
SAutotuning mode
(Open loop vector control at factory
setting.) Autotuning
DATA (Rated voltage setting) DATA
ENTER ENTER
G5: Main Menu : Rated Voltage Rated Voltage
Autotuning 200.0 VAC 200.0 VAC
ESC ESC
IMPORTANT When running the Inverter after using digital operator, press the MENU Key to enter the operation mode and
then press the DATA/ENTER Key from the operation mode display to bring up the monitor display. Run com-
mands cant be received from any other display. (Monitor display in the operation mode appears when the
power is turned ON.)
4-5
Setting User Constants
4.2.3 User Constant Access Levels
Set the access level in initialize mode with user constant A1-01.
4 4 Access Level
QUICKSTART
6 A101 = 3
Basic
7 DATA
ENTER Entry Accepted
DATA
ENTER
G5: Main Menu : Select Language
Initialize English
DATA
ENTER
Access Level A101 = 2:::
QUICKSTART QUICKSTART
A101 = 3
Basic
DATA
ENTER
Access Level
Basic Entry Accepted
4-6
4.2 Modes
Initialize mode
DATA
Programming mode ENTER
4
b1-02 Run Source
Constant to be changed
4-7
Setting User Constants
4.2.3 User Constant Access Levels
4 Run Source
Terminals
5 Stopping Method
Ramp to Stop
6 Accel Time 1
C101 = 10.0 Sec
4 7 DATA
ENTER
Accel Time 1
0010.0 Sec
Selects the user constant so that the
leading 0 blinks. The digit that is
blinking can be changed.
8 Accel Time 1 Blinking digit moves 2 places to the
RESET 0010.0 Sec right.
Press twice.
9 Accel Time 1 Changes 1 to 2.
0020.0 Sec
10 DATA
ENTER Entry Accepted
4-8
4.2 Modes
4 Function b2
DC Braking
5 Function C1
Accel/Decel
11 Function C1
ESC
Accel/Decel
4-9
Setting User Constants
4.2.3 User Constant Access Levels
4 Group C
Tuning
11 Function C1
ESC
Accel/Decel
The constant setting in Advanced level (acceleration time change from 10.0 to 20.0 s) has been completed.
4 - 10
4.2 Modes
IMPORTANT When running the Inverter after using digital operator, press the MENU Key to enter the operation mode and
then press the DATA/ENTER Key from the operation mode display to bring up the monitor display.Run com-
mands cant be received from any other display. (Monitor display in the operation mode appears when the
power is turned ON.)
4
MENU
4 - 11
Setting User Constants
4.2.4 Operation Mode
The output signal levels for multi-function analog outputs shown in the table are for a gain of 100.0 and
a bias of 0.00.
Table 4.3 Constants Monitored in Operation Mode
Name Valid Access Levels
Func- Con-
Con Output Signal Levels for Min. Open
tion stant Digital Operator Function Multi-function Analog Out- Unit V/f w/ -loop
Flux
V/f Vec-
No. Display puts PG Vec-
tor
tor
1: Terminal 2 ON
1: Terminal 3 ON
U1-10
U1 10 Cantt be output.
Can Q Q Q Q
1: Terminal 4 ON
1: Terminal 5 ON
1: Terminal 7 ON
1: Terminal 8 ON
1: Terminal 25 ON
U1-11
U1 11 Cantt be output.
Can Q Q Q Q
1: Terminal 26 ON
4 - 12
4.2 Modes
1: Zero-speed level
U1 12
U1-12 1: Reverse Cant be output
output. Q Q Q Q
1: Reset input ON
1: F.ref/F.out agree
Int Ctl Sts 1 1: Inverter ready
Terminal 13 input
voltage level
Monitors the input voltage of
the frequency reference (volt-
10 V: 100% (10 V)
4
U1-15
U1 15 age).
g ) 0.1 % B B B B
(0 to
t 10
10 V possible)
ibl )
An input of 10 V corresponds to
Term 13 Level 100%.
Terminal 14 input Monitors the input current of the
current level frequency reference (current). 20 mA: 100% (20 mA)
U1-16
U1 16 0.1 % B B B B
A iinputt off 20 mA
An A corresponds
d (0 tto +10 V output)
t t)
Term 14 Level to 100%.
4 - 13
Setting User Constants
4.2.4 Operation Mode
OPE fault
U1-34
U1 34 constant Shows the first constant number Cantt be output.
Can A A A A
where an OPE fault is detected
detected.
OPE Detected
Shows the number of PG pulses
Zero servo move- for the movement range at the
U1-35 Cant be output. 1 A
ment pulses stop point for a zero servo times
4.
4 - 14
4.2 Modes
Current fault
U2 01
U2-01 Information on the current fault Q Q Q Q
Current Fault
Last fault
U2 02
U2-02 Information on the last fault Q Q Q Q
Last Fault
Frequency refer-
U2-03
U2 03 ence at fault Frequency reference value when 0.01 Q Q Q Q
the last fault occurred
occurred. Hz
Frequency Ref
Output frequency
U2-04
U2 04 at fault Output frequency when the last 0.01 Q Q Q Q
fault occurred
occurred. Hz
Output Freq
Output current at
U2-05
U2 05 fault Output current when the last 0.1 A Q Q Q Q
fault occurred
occurred.
Output Current
Motor speed at
U2-06
U2 06 fault Motor speed when the last 0.01 Q Q Q
Motor Speed
fault occurred
occurred. Hz
4
Output voltage ref-
U2-07
U2 07 erence at fault Output voltage when the last 0.1 V Q Q Q Q
fault occurred
occurred.
Fault Output Voltage
trace DC bus voltage at Cant be output.
(See fault The main circuit DC voltage
note )
note.) U2-08
U2 08 1V Q Q Q Q
when the last fault occurred
occurred.
DC Bus Voltage
Output power at
U2-09
U2 09 fault Output power when the last 0.1 kW Q Q Q Q
fault occurred
occurred.
Output kWatts
Torque reference Torque reference when the last
U2-10
U2 10 at fault fault occurred.
fault 0.1 % Q Q
Torque Reference (The rated torque = 100%.)
Input terminal sta- Input terminal status when the
U2-11
U2 11 tus at fault last fault occurred.
last fault Q Q Q Q
Input Term Sts (Same format as U1-10.)
Output terminal Output terminal status when the
U2-12
U2 12 status at fault last fault occurred.
last fault Q Q Q Q
Output Term Sts (Same format as U1-11.)
Operation status Inverter operating status when
U2-13
U2 13 at fault the last fault occurred.
last fault Q Q Q Q
Inverter status (Same format as U1-12.)
Cumulative opera- Elapsed operating or power-on
U2-14
U2 14 tion time at fault time when the last fault oc-
last fault 1 hr Q Q Q Q
Elapsed time curred.
Note When faults CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1 and UV2 occur, a fault trace is not performed.
4 - 15
Setting User Constants
4.2.4 Operation Mode
Note Faults CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1 and UV2 are not recorded in the fault history.
J Monitoring at Startup
In operation mode, the frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage can be
monitored immediately if the factory presets are being used. One of these four values, the output voltage,
can be changed to a different monitor item. When an item other than the output voltage is to be monitored,
set that value in user constant o1-01 (Monitor selection). Refer to the example procedure given later in this
manual.
When the power is turned ON, the frequency reference will appear in the Units data display if the factor
presets are being used. Any one of the four values monitored at startup (frequency reference, output fre-
quency, output current, or the value set in user constant o1-01) can be selected to appear when the power
is turned ON.
The value that appears at startup is determined by user constant o1-02 (Monitor selection after power up).
User constants o1-01 and o1-02 can be changed in the Basic or Advanced access levels. These user
constants can be changed during operation.
J Monitor Displays
The following notation is used in this manual when describing user constants.
User Valid Access Levels
Constant Display Name Change during Setting Unit Factory Setting Open
V/f V/f with Flux
Number Operation Range Control PG Loop Vector
Vector
o1-01 Monitor selection f 4 to 38 6 B B B B
Use the last two digits from the U1 Monitor list (U1-jj) to select a value. For example, the torque refer-
ence is U1-09, so input 9 to select the torque reference.
Indicates whether or not the constant can be changed during operation.
Change during
Ch d i f Can be changed during operation.
Operation
Cannot be changed during operation.
Setting Range The setting range for the constant.
Units The unit used to set the constant ( indicates that no unit is used).
The value preset at the factory. (There are different factory settings for each control meth-
Factory Setting
od, i.e., if the control method is changed, the factory setting can also change.)
4 - 16
4.2 Modes
Indicates the control methods and access levels under which the constant can be accessed
and set.
Q Accessible/settable under all access levels (Quick-start, Basic, and Advanced).
Valid Access
Levels B Accessible/settable under Advanced or Basic access levels.
A Accessible/settable under Advanced access level.
Not accessible/settable in the specified control method.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Use constant o1-02 to indicate which value will be displayed when the Inverter is started. Refer to the fol-
lowing table.
4 Function o1
Monitor Select
Press twice.
5 DATA User Monitor Sel Changed to constant setting level.
ENTER
Output Voltage
7 o101 = 8
Output kWatts
Press twice.
8 DATA Writes-in the new setting.
ENTER
Entry Accepted
4 - 17
Setting User Constants
4.2.5 Initialize Mode
AEXAMPLE" Changing Monitor Display to Output Current at Startup in Basic Access Level
Use the following procedure to change user constant o1-02 so that the output current is displayed at startup.
(The procedure continues from the end of the previous example.)
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display Remarks
1 User Monitor Sel Check the display.
Output kWatts
2 Power-On Monitor
Frequency Ref
4 o102 = 3
Output Current
Press twice.
5 DATA Writes-in the new setting.
ENTER Entry Accepted
6 Function o1
ESC
Monitor Select
4 7 G5: Main Menu :
ESC
Programming
Output current has been set in monitor selection after power ON.
4.2.5 Initialize Mode
The initialize mode is used to select the language displayed by the Unit, the access level, and the control
method; it is also used to initialize the Units user constants. The structure of the initialize mode is shown
in Figure 4.7.
Control mode
Initialize
Password
4 - 18
4.2 Modes
0 (English)
1 (Japanese)
2
4
3 DATA
ENTER
4 - 19
Setting User Constants
4.2.5 Initialize Mode
4 tion Vector
Control method 2
A1-02 0 to 3 (Open Loop Q Q Q Q
selection
Vector)
4 Control Method
Open Loop
Press twice.
5 DATA A102 = 2::: Changed to constant setting level.
ENTER Open Loop
6 A102 = 3
Flux Vector
7 DATA Writes-in the new setting.
ENTER Entry Accepted
4 - 20
4.2 Modes
0, 1110, 2220,
A1-03 Initialize 0 Q Q Q Q
3330
1
Forward Run/Stop
2
Reverse Run/Stop
11
Sequential input common
4 - 21
Setting User Constants
4.2.5 Initialize Mode
When setting a 3-wire sequence, the operation can be started and stopped with an automatically reset-
ting pushbutton switch.
Stop switch (NC) Run switch (NO)
1
Run command
(Operates when the run switch is closed.)
2
Stop command
(Stops when the stop switch is open.)
5
Forward/Reverse run command
(Multi-function input 3)
11
Sequential input common
2
4 G5: Main Menu :
Initialize
4 Init Parameters
No Initialize
Press 3 times.
5 DATA A103 = 0:::
ENTER No Initialize
6 A103 = 2220
2-wire Initial
4 - 22
4.2 Modes
MENU
9 Enter Password
ESC
A104 = 0
4 - 23
Setting User Constants
4.2.5 Initialize Mode
Programming Only the user constants specified in A2-01 through A2-32 can be displayed or
set.
Autotuning The user constants cannot be displayed.
Modified constants The user constants cannot be displayed.
4 Function A2
User Constants
4 7 User Param 1
C101
Press twice.
8 User Param 1 Writes-in set value 0000.
RESET C101
Press twice.
9 User Param 1
C108
Press 7 times.
10 DATA Writes-in the new setting.
ENTER Entry Accepted
11 Function A2
ESC
User Constants
12 Access Level
Advanced
Press twice.
13 DATA A101 = 4:::
ENTER Advanced
4 - 24
4.2 Modes
The access level has been set to the user program access level.
Figure 4.10 shows the structure of the user constants.
Control Method
Initialize
Password 4
Function Selection A2 A2-01 User Param 1
4 - 25
Setting User Constants
4.2.6 Programming Mode
Open-loop Vector
Group Function Display Comments
Flux Vector
V/f w/PG
V/f
Settings such as the reference input
b1 Operating modes Sequence f f f f
method
b2 DC braking DC Braking DC braking function settings f f f f
b3 Speed searching Speed Search Speed search function settings f f f f
b4 Timer functions Delay Timers Timer function settings f f f f
b Application
pp b5 PID control PID Control PID control settings f f f f
b6 Dwell functions Reference Dwell Accel/decel time dwell function settings f f f f
b7 Droop control Droop Control Droop control (speed drop) settings f
Terminal input energy-saving control
b8 Energy-saving control Energy Saving f f
settings
b9 Zero servo Zero Servo Stop in the position loop f
Acceleration/deceleration
4 C1
times
Accel/Decel Acceleration/deceleration time settings f f f f
4 - 26
4.2 Modes
Control Meth-
od
Open-loop Vector
Group Function Display Comments
Flux Vector
V/f w/PG
V/f
PG speed control card
F1 PG Option Setup User constant settings for a PG Card f f
settings
Analog Reference Card User constant settings for an Analog
F2 AI-14 Setup f f f f
AI Reference Card
User constant settings for a Digital Ref-
F3 Digital Reference Card DI DI-08, 16 Setup f f f f
erence Card
User constant settings for an Analog
F4 Analog Monitor Card AO AO-08, 12 Setup f f f f
Monitor Card
User constant settings for a Digital Out-
F Options F5 Digital Output Card DO DO-02C f f f f
put Card
User constant settings for a Digital Out-
F6 Digital Output Card DO DO-08 f f f f
put Card
User constant settings for a Pulse Moni-
F7 Pulse Monitor Card PO PO-36F Setup f f f f
tor Card
4
SI-F/SI-G Transmission User constant settings for a Transmis-
F8 SI-F/G f f f f
Card sion Card
Transmission cards other User constant settings for a Transmis-
F9 DDS/SI-B f f f f
than SI-K2, SI-F/G sion Card
Function selection for multi-function
H1 Multi-function inputs Digital Inputs f f f f
inputs
Function selection for multi-function
H2 Multi-function outputs Digital Outputs f f f f
outputs
H Terminal H3 Analog inputs Analog Inputs Function selection for analog inputs f f f f
Multi-function analog out-
H4 Analog Outputs Function selection for analog outputs f f f f
puts
MEMOBUS communica-
H5 Serial Com Setup MEMOBUS communications settings f f f f
tions
Overload protection settings and selec-
L1 Motor protection functions Motor Overload f f f f
tion
Momentary power loss Selects the power-loss processing meth-
L2 PwrLoss Ridethru f f f f
ride-through od.
L3 Stall prevention Stall Prevention Stall prevention settings and selection f f f f
Frequency detection settings and selec-
L4 Frequency detection Ref Detection f f f f
tion
L Protection
L5 Fault restart Fault Restart Fault restart function settings f f f f
Overtorque detection settings and selec-
L6 Overtorque detection Torque Detection f f f f
tion
Torque limit settings (vector control
L7 Torque limits Torque Limit f f
only)
Overheating and phase loss protection
L8 Hardware protection Hdwe Protection f f f f
settings
o1 Display/Monitor settings Monitor Select Selects the display and setting methods. f f f f
o Operator Key function selection and other user
o2 Function settings Key Selections f f f f
constants
4 - 27
Setting User Constants
4.2.6 Programming Mode
Figure 4.11 shows the difference in the display structure for the various access levels.
Advanced Level Basic Level Quick-start Level
DATA DATA
[Mode] [Group] ENTER [Function] ENTER [Constant]
Programming mode
DATA b2 DC braking b2-01 Zero speed level
ENTER
4 - 28
4.2 Modes
CAUTION
D Disconnect the load (machine, device) from the motor before autotuning.
The motor may turn, possibly resulting in injury or damage to equipment. Also, motor constants cannot be
correctly set with the motor attached to a load.
Autotuning automatically tunes and sets the required motor constants when operating in the open-loop or
flux vector control modes. Always perform autotuning before starting operation.
When the rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, and number of poles listed on the motor nameplate
have been input and the RUN Key is pressed, the motor constants calculated from these values will be writ-
ten to E1-04 through E2-09 automatically.
When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, motor constants can be set by calculation. Contact
your Yaskawa representatives for details.
The autotuning mode wont be displayed if V/f control has been selected. Refer to Setting the Control
Method: A1-02 under 4.2.5 Initialize Mode.
The Inverters autotuning function automatically determines the motor constants, while a servo systems
autotuning function determines the size of a load, so these autotuning functions are fundamentally differ-
ent.
AEXAMPLE" Autotuning Procedure
Step
1
Key Sequence Digital Operator Display Remarks
4
MENU
G5: Main Menu :
Operation
7 Rated Current
1.90 A
8 DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
Press the keys as in steps 4, 5, 6 of
RESET
rated voltage setting.
9 Rated Frequency
60.0 HZ
10 DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
Press the keys as in steps 4, 5, 6 of
RESET
rated voltage setting.
11 Rated Speed
1750 RPM
12 DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
Press the keys as in steps 4, 5, 6 of
RESET
rated voltage setting.
4 - 29
Setting User Constants
4.2.7 Autotuning Mode
14 DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
Press the keys as in steps 4, 5, 6 of
RESET
rated voltage setting.
15 Select Motor 1/2
1
16 DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
Press the keys as in steps 4, 5, 6 of
RESET
rated voltage setting.
Leave the setting at 1 to set the value
for motor 1 (the motor contacts nor-
mally used.)
Select 2 to store the autotuning re-
sults for motor 2.
17 Tuning Ready?
Press RUN Key
18 Tune Processing
RUN
VHzVVVVA Autotuning starts and the motor ro-
tates for approx. one minute.
IMPORTANT If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to Table 5.1 Troubleshooting Autotuning Faults.
4 - 30
4.2 Modes
4 Frequency Ref 1
d101 = 60.00 HZ 4
5 DATA Frequency Ref 1
ENTER 060.00 HZ
7 Frequency Ref 1
030.00HZ
press 3 times.
8 DATA 30.00 Hz is written-in.
ENTER Entry Accepted
4 - 31
5
Trial Operation
This chapter describes the preparations and Digital Operator procedures for
trial operation of the VS-616G5 and provides an example of trial operation.
5-1
Trial Operation
5.2.5 Autotuning
WARNING
D Check to be sure that the front cover is attached before turning ON the power supply. Do not
remove the front cover during operation.
An electric shock may occur.
D Do not come close to the machine when the fault reset function is used. If the alarmed is cleared,
the machine may start moving suddenly. Also, design the machine so that human safety is en-
sured even when it is restarted.
Injury may occur.
D Provide a separate emergency stop switch; the Digital Operators STOP Key is valid only when
its function is set.
Injury may occur.
D Reset alarms only after confirming that the RUN signal is OFF. If an alarm is reset with the RUN
signal turned ON, the machine may suddenly start.
Injury may occur.
CAUTION
D Dont touch the radiation fins (heat sink), braking resistor, or Braking Resistor Unit. These can
become very hot.
Otherwise, a burn injury may occur.
D Be sure that the motor and machine is within the applicable ranges before starting operation.
Otherwise, an injury may occur.
D Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Always construct the external sequence to confirm that the holding brake is activated in the event
of an emergency, a power failure, or an abnormality in the inverter occuring.
5 Failure to observe this caution can result in personal injury.
D If using with an elevator, take safety measures on the machines side to prevent the elevator from
dropping.
Failure to observe this caution can result in personal injury.
D Dont check signals while the Inverter is running.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
D Be careful when changing Inverter settings. The Inverter is factory set to suitable settings.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged. You must, however, you must set the power supply voltage
jumper for 400 V class Inverters of 18.5 kW or higher (see 5.2.4).
5-2
5.2 Trial Operation Procedures
5.1 Procedure
Perform trial operation according to the following operational flow.
Item Contents Page
Installation and
Install the Inverter according to the installation conditions. 2-1
Mounting
S Ensure that the installation conditions are met.
Wiring and Connec-
Connect to the power supply and peripheral devices. 3-1
tion
S Select peripheral devices which meet the specifications and wire correctly.
Power ON Carrying out the following pre-connection checks before turning ON the power supply: 5-4
S Always ensure that a power supply of the correct voltage is used and that the power input terminals (R, S, T)
are wired correctly.
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 230 VDC, 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 460 VDC, 50/60 Hz
S Make sure that the Motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the Motor are connected correctly.
S Make sure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly. Make sure that all control
circuit terminals are turned OFF.
S When using a PG Speed Control Card, ensure that it is wired correctly.
S Set the motor to no-load status, (not connected to the mechanical system).
Having conducted the above checks, connect the power supply.
Check the Display
Check to be sure that there are no faults in the Inverter. 5-4
Status
S If the display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
Data Display: Frequency Ref
*1
S When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed. In that case, refer to Section 9 Maintenance
Operations. 5
Setting the Input Volt-
Set the Inverter input voltage (E1-01) to the correct voltage. 5-5
age
Set the Motor Set the proper motor protection (E1-02). 5-6
Execute autotuning for the motor separately before operating in open-loop vector control or Flux vector control
Autotuning *2 5-6
modes.
No-load Operation Start the no-load motor using the Digital Operator. 5-9
S Set the frequency reference using the Digital Operator and start the motor using key sequences.
Actual Load Opera-
Connect the mechanical system and operate using the Digital Operator. 5 - 10
tion
S When there are no difficulties using the no-load operation, connect the mechanical system to the motor and oper-
ate using the Digital Operator.
Operation Basic Operation: Operation based on the basic settings required to start and stop the Inverter. 6-1
Advanced Operation: Operation which uses PID control or other functions. 7-1
S For operation within standard constants select Basic Operation.
S To use the various applied functions such as, direct current control braking, speed search, timer, S-curve accel-
eration/deceleration, slip compensation, torque compensation, droop control, zero-servo, and torque control,
select Advanced Operation in combination with Basic Operation.
* 2 When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, motor constants can be set by calculation. Contact
your Yaskawa representatives for details.
5-3
Trial Operation
5.2.5 Autotuning
When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that
case, refer to Section 9 Maintenance Operations. The following display is an example of a fault display.
UV The display will differ depending
[Fault]
Under Voltage on the type of fault.
5-4
5.2 Trial Operation Procedures
5
ENTER
200 VAC
5 Input Voltage The 2nd digit will blink.
RESET 200 VAC
6 Input Voltage Set to 3
230 VAC
Press 3 times.
7 DATA The set value is overwritten. Entry
ENTER Entry Accepted Accepted is displayed for approxi-
mately 0.5 seconds.
Input Voltage Returns to the input voltage display.
E1-01 = 230 VAC Check that the data has been updated.
J Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or
Higher)
Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting the input voltage constant (E1-01) for 400 V class Invert-
ers of 18.5 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the power tap nearest to the actual power supply voltage.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the follow-
ing procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply switch and wait for at least one minute (three minutes for models larger
than 30 kW) before removing the front panel and setting the jumper.
2. Remove the front cover.
3. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Figure 5.1).
5-5
Trial Operation
5.2.5 Autotuning
20CN
21CN
TB2
Jumper
Fig 5.1 Setting the Power Supply Voltage (Illustration Above is for 400 V Class Inverter
between 18.5 kW and 45 kW)
J Motor Selection (Motor Overheating Protection): E1-02
Set the type of motor being used with the motor selection constant (E1-02). This setting is a reference for
the motor overheat protection.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Motor selection
E1-02 (motor overheating 0 to 2 0 Q Q Q Q
protection)
D E1-02 Settings
Setting Function
0 Standard motor (general-purpose motor)
5 1 Special motor (inverter-exclusive motor)
2 Special motor (vector-exclusive motor)
5.2.5 Autotuning
J Autotuning Operation
Use the following procedure to autotune the motor constants, i.e., set them automatically.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display Remarks
5-6
5.2 Trial Operation Procedures
*1 When the values displayed and the motor constants differ, set each value seperately.
*2 There are differences between simple and advanced settings. Refer to the table below.
Operator Display Simple Setting (Motor name- Advanced Setting *
plate)
Rated Voltage Motor rated voltage No-load voltage at rated revolul-
tions
Rated Frequency Motor rated frequency No-load frequency at rated revolu-
tions
The rated voltage for the vector control motor may be 10% to 20% lower than general-purpose motors.
Always check the voltage on the motor nameplate or in the test reports.
The following example procedure changes the motor rated current to 1.60 A.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display Remarks
Rated Current Displays the rated current.
1.90 A
D When autotuning has been executed correctly, the constants (E1-04 to E2-09) will be automatically
written.
D Use the following troubleshooting procedure if a fault occurs during autotuning.
J Troubleshooting Autotuning Faults
The displays and countermeasures for autotuning faults are shown below in Table 5.1. If one of these faults
is detected, it will be displayed on the Operator and the motor will coast to a stop. The fault contact and
alarm contact outputs will not function. When a fault occurs, Tune Aborted will be displayed and the
messages shown in the following table will blink.
Table 5.1 Troubleshooting Autotuning Faults
Display Message Fault Description Countermeasure
S Check the input data.
Data Invalid Motor data fault Motor data error for autotuning.
S Check the Inverter and motor capacities.
Resistance Line resistance fault
No-load Current No-load current fault
Saturated core coeffi- S Check the input data.
Saturation -1 Autotuning was not completed
cient 1 fault
within a set time. S Check the motor wiring.
wiring
Saturated core coeffi-
Saturation -2
cient 2 fault
Rated Slip Rated slip fault
5-7
Trial Operation
5.2.5 Autotuning
5-8
5.2 Trial Operation Procedures
2. Check the motor nameplate and set the following three items.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
0.0 to 255.0
200.0
E1-05 Max. voltage (0.0 to VAC Q Q Q Q
(400.0)
510.0)
E1-06 Base frequency 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 60.0 Q Q Q Q
(10 to 200%
E2-01 Motor rated current Inverter rated A * Q Q Q Q
current ratio)
* The factory setting for rated current differs according to the Inverter capacity.
The setting procedure for these three constants is as follows:
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display Remarks
G5: Main Menu : Displays operation mode.
Operation
1 G5: Main Menu : Displays programming mode.
Programming
Press twice.
2 DATA Reference Source Puts the Unit in programming mode.
ENTER
Terminal
3 Max. Voltage Displays the maximum voltage.*
E1-05 = 200. 0 VAC
Press 14 times.
4 Base Frequency Displays the maximum voltage fre-
E1-06 = 60. 0 HZ quency.*
5
5 Motor Rated FLA Displays the rated current.*
E2-01 = 1. 90 A
Press 5 times.
6 G5: Main Menu : Returns to the operation mode dis-
MENU
Operation play.
* When there are discrepancies between the displayed values and the rating, set each value individu-
ally.
5.2.6 No-load Operation
The section describes trial operation in which the motor is operated from the Digital Operator with the mo-
tor in the no-load state (with the motor not connected to the mechanical system).
5-9
Trial Operation
5.2.5 Autotuning
5 - 10
6
Basic Operation
This chapter explains the basic settings required to operate and stop the
VS-616G5. The user constants described here will be sufficient for simple
Inverter.
Even when your application requires special functions, such as torque con-
trol or PID control, make these basic settings first and then go to the explana-
tions of those special functions in chapter 7 Advanced Operation.
6-1
Basic Operation
6.1.1 Setting the Access Level and Control Method: A1-01, A1-02
6.1.1 Setting the Access Level and Control Method: A1-01, A1-02
D The control method setting also affects which constants can be displayed and changed. Refer to chapter
8 User Constants.
D The constants required for basic operation can be displayed and changed in the Basic level, but this
section also describes constants that can be set only in the Advanced level, so set the access level to
6 Advanced.
Changing the Access Level
The following procedure shows how to change from Quick-Start to Advanced.
Step Key Sequence Digital Operator Display Remarks
1 G5: Main Menu : Displays operation mode.
MENU
Operation
6-2
6.1 Common Settings
2
Control method Open
A1-02 0 to 3 Q Q Q Q
selection Loop
Vector
D Vector control has a greater starting torque and more precise speed control than V/f control, so use of
vector control is recommended whenever possible.
Use V/f control in the following types of applications:
When several motors are being operated
When special motors, such as submersible motors or spindle motors, are being used
(situations in which auto-tuning cannot be used)
When operation is being coordinated with an older V/f control inverter control system
6-3
Basic Operation
6.1.2 Frequency Reference Settings: b1-01, H3-01, H3-08, H3-09
D Settings
Setting Reference source
0 Digital Operator
1 Control circuit terminals (analog inputs)
2 MEMOBUS transmission (using SI-K2)
3 Optional Card
4 MEMOBUS transmission (for CP-717)
D The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals (external terminals), so set b1-01
to 1.
J Frequency Reference (Voltage), Terminal 13 Signal Level: H3-01
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
6 D The frequency reference (voltage) is valid when constant b1-01 has been set to 1.
D Set the voltage range for the frequency reference (voltage) signal.
D Settings
Setting Function
0 0 to 10 VDC input [11-bit + polarity (positive/ negative) input]
10 to 10 VDC input
1
(A negative voltage is a reference for reverse rotation.)
Multi-function ana-
H3-09 log input (terminal 1 to 1F 1F A A A A
14)
D After setting constant H3-09, set terminal 14 signal level with H3-08.
Signal Level: H3-08
D The frequency reference (current) is valid when constant b1-01 has been set to 1.
D Set the signal level for the frequency reference (current).
6-4
6.1 Common Settings
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Settings
Setting Function
0 0 to 10 VDC input (10-bit input)
10 to 10 VDC input
1
(A negative voltage is a reference for reverse rotation.)
2 4 to 20 mA input
D When the terminal is being used as a voltage input terminal (setting 0 or 1), jumper J1 must be discon-
nected on the control board. (See Figure 6.1.) The terminals input resistor will be destroyed if the ter-
minal is used for a voltage input with jumper J1 connected.
D When frequency references are being input simultaneously from both the voltage terminal 13 and the
current terminal 14, the final reference value will be the sum of the two references that are input.
D To switch the frequency reference input between the voltage terminal 13 and the current terminal 14,
set a value of 1F in any one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 through H1-06).
The voltage terminal 13 will be used when this multi-function input is OFF and the current terminal
14 will be used when this multi-function input is ON.
D If a 0 to 10 VDC input is set, H3-01 must also be set to a 0 to 10 VDC input.
Jumper wire
J1
Control circuit
terminals 6
11 12(G) 13 14 15 16 17 25 26 27 33 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 9 10
R S T U V W/T3
1 2 B1 B2 T2
L1 L2 L3 T1
Main circuit
Power input Braking Resistor Motor output terminals
CHARGE
6-5
Basic Operation
6.1.2 Frequency Reference Settings: b1-01, H3-01, H3-08, H3-09
J Function and Signal Level for Multi-function Analog Input (Terminal 16):
H3-04, H3-05
D This function is useful when switching between two analog inputs. The input is from terminal 16.
D When using the multi-function input (terminal 16) as the frequency reference terminal, first set the
multi-function analog input function to Auxiliary Reference by setting constant H3-05 to 0.
Function for Multi-function Analog Input, Terminal 16: H3-05
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Multi-function ana-
H3-05 log input (terminal 0 to 1F 0 B B B B
16)
D Settings
Setting Function
J Adjusting Analog Inputs: H3-02, H3-03, H3-06, H3-07, H3-10, H3-11, H3-12
D There are three constants used to adjust the analog inputs: The gain, bias (both set separately for each
input), and filter time constant (a single value for all of the inputs).
The gain and bias can be adjusted separately for each analog input (terminals 13, 14, and 16).
Gain: Set the frequency corresponding to a 10 V (20 mA) input as a percentage of the
maximum frequency. (The maximum output frequency set in E1-04 is 100%.)
Bias: Set the frequency corresponding to a 0 V (4 mA) input as a percentage of the
maximum frequency. (The maximum output frequency set in E1-04 is 100%.)
Set the gains and biases for terminals 13, 14, and 16 as follows:
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
0.0 to
H3-02 Gain for terminal 13 f % 100.0 B B B B
1000.0
100.0 to
H3-03 Bias for terminal 13 f % 0.0 B B B B
100.0
0.0 to
H3-10 Gain for terminal 14 f % 100.0 A A A A
1000.0
100.0 to
H3-11 Bias for terminal 14 f % 0.0 A A A A
100.0
0.0 to
H3-06 Gain for terminal 16* f % 100.0 B B B B
1000.0
100.0 to
H3-07 Bias for terminal 16* f % 0.0 B B B B
100.0
* The settings for terminal 16 are valid only when the multi-function analog input has been se-
lected. The gain and bias set here will be disregarded if a frequency reference is selected and
the values set for terminal 13 will be used.
6-6
6.1 Common Settings
Frequency
reference
D This setting is effective when there are sudden changes or noise in the analog input signal.
D Responsiveness decreases as the setting increases.
6.1.3 Frequency Reference from Digital Operator: b1-01, o1-03, d1-01 to d1-09
D Settings
Setting Reference source
0 Digital Operator
1 Control circuit terminals (analog inputs)
2 MEMOBUS transmission (using SI-K2)
3 Optional Card
4 MEMOBUS transmission (for CP-717)
D The frequency reference is input from the Digital Operator, so set b1-01 to 0.
J Frequency Unit for Reference Setting and Monitoring: o1-03
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Settings
Setting Function
0 0.01 Hz units
1 0.01% units (The maximum frequency is 100%.)
6-7
Basic Operation
6.1.3 Frequency Reference from Digital Operator: b1-01, o1-03, d1-01 to d1-09
Setting Function
r/min units
2 to 39 r/min = 120 frequency reference (Hz)/o1-03
(o1-03 becomes the motor pole)
Set the binary point position using the value of the fifth digit of o1-03.
The display when the fifth digit = 0 will be VVVV
The display when the fifth digit = 1 will be VVV.V
The display when the fifth digit = 2 will be VV.VV
The display when the fifth digit = 3 will be V.VVV
Set the values for 100% frequency for the fourth to first digits of o1-03.
40 to 39999 Example 1
Set o1-03=12000 when 100% speed is set to 200.0.
100% speed will be displayed as 200.0 when o1-03 is set to 12000.
60% speed will be displayed as 120.0.
Example 2
Set o1-03=26500 when 100% speed is set to 65.00.
60% speed will be displayed as 39.00 when o1-03 is set to 26500.
D When the 40 to 39,999 range is used, any unit can be set for the reference frequency.
For example, the frequency reference can be displayed or set in units such as mm/s or m/min to coin-
cide with the linear operating speed of the machine.
J Preset Frequency Reference Values: d1-01 through d1-09
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Frequency refer-
d1-01 f 0 to 400.00 o1-03 0.00 Hz Q Q Q Q
ence 1
Frequency refer-
d1-02 f 0 to 400.00 o1-03 0.00 Hz Q Q Q Q
ence 2
Frequency refer-
d1-03 0 to 400.00 o1-03 0.00 Hz Q Q Q Q
6
f
ence 3
Frequency refer-
d1-04 f 0 to 400.00 o1-03 0.00 Hz Q Q Q Q
ence 4
Frequency refer-
d1-05 f 0 to 400.00 o1-03 0.00 Hz B B B B
ence 5
Frequency refer-
d1-06 f 0 to 400.00 o1-03 0.00 Hz B B B B
ence 6
Frequency refer-
d1-07 f 0 to 400.00 o1-03 0.00 Hz B B B B
ence 7
Frequency refer-
d1-08 f 0 to 400.00 o1-03 0.00 Hz B B B B
ence 8
Jog frequency ref-
d1-09 f 0 to 400.00 o1-03 6.00 Hz Q Q Q Q
erence
6-8
6.1 Common Settings
6.1.4 Run Source and Sequence Input Responsiveness: b1-02, b1-06, b1-07
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Operation method
b1-02 0 to 4 1 Q Q Q Q
selection
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Set the responsiveness of the control inputs (forward/reverse run and multi-function inputs) 6
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Two scans every 2 ms (Use when connecting transistor outputs.)
1 Two scans every 5 ms (Use when connecting contact outputs or switches.)
D Set the responsiveness to match the type of control inputs being used. Use a setting of 1 if there is one
or more contact inputs.
J Operation after Switching to Remote Mode: b1-07
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Operation selection
b1-07 after switching to re- 0, 1 0 A A A A
mote mode
D Set the interlock operation to be used after switching from local mode (operation from Digital Opera-
tor) to remote mode (operation according to control circuit terminal).
D Settings
Setting Function
No operation even if RUN signal is ON after switching to remote mode. (Operation will start if
0
the RUN signal turns OFF and then back ON after switching to remote mode.)
1 Operate according to the RUN signal after switching to remote mode.
6-9
Basic Operation
6.1.5 Acceleration/Deceleration Times: C1-01 through C1-08, C1-09, C1-10, C1-11
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Sets the acceleration/deceleration time unit to 0.01 seconds.
1 Sets the acceleration/deceleration time unit to 0.1 seconds.
D Set 0 to set more precise acceleration and deceleration times. (This will reduce the setting range.)
J Acceleration/Deceleration Times: C1-01 through C1-08
D Set individual acceleration and deceleration times.
An acceleration time is the time required to go from 0% to 100% of the maximum output frequen-
cy.
A deceleration time is the time required to go from 100% to 0% of the maximum output frequency.
D Four acceleration times and four deceleration times can be set. When using acceleration/deceleration
times 2 through 4, set multi-function inputs (H1-01 through H1-06) to the acceleration/deceleration
time selectors 1 and 2.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
0.0 to
C1-01 Acceleration time 1 f s 10.0 Q Q Q Q
6 6000.0
0.0 to
C1-02 Deceleration time 1 f s 10.0 Q Q Q Q
6000.0
0.0 to
C1-03 Acceleration time 2 f s 10.0 B B B B
6000.0
0.0 to
C1-04 Deceleration time 2 f s 10.0 B B B B
6000.0
0.0 to
C1-05 Acceleration time 3 s 10.0 A A A A
6000.0
0.0 to
C1-06 Deceleration time 3 s 10.0 A A A A
6000.0
0.0 to
C1-07 Acceleration time 4 s 10.0 A A A A
6000.0
0.0 to
C1-08 Deceleration time 4 s 10.0 A A A A
6000.0
D The setting range for the acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting in C1-10 (acceleration/
deceleration time unit). The table shows the setting range when the factory setting is used for C1-10.
D If C1-10 is set to 0 (0.01 s) the setting range will be 0.00 to 600.00 s.
J Emergency Stop Time: C1-09
D Sets the deceleration time that will be used when an emergency stop signal is input or a fault is detected.
The deceleration time is the time required to go from 100% to 0% of the maximum output frequency.
D When using an emergency stop input, set a multi-function input (H1-01 through H1-06) to for an emer-
gency stop.
D The emergency stop time is effective for the following faults. Set a stopping method for each.
Inverter overheating (OH) pre-alarm: Set in L8-03.
Pulse generator faults: Set in F1-02 through F1-04.
6 - 10
6.1 Common Settings
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
0.0 to
C1-09 Emergency stop time f s 10.0 B B B B
6000.0
D The setting range for the emergency stop deceleration time depends upon the setting in C1-10 (accel-
eration/deceleration time unit). The table shows the setting range when the factory setting is used for
C1-10.
D If C1-10 is set to 0 (0.01 s) the setting range will be 0.00 to 600.00 s.
J Acceleration/Deceleration Time Switching Frequency: C1-11
D When an acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency is set, the acceleration and deceleration
times will be changed automatically as the frequency passes the set level.
D If the acceleration/deceleration time selectors 1 and 2 are input via the multi-function inputs, they will
have priority.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Accel/decel time
C1-11 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 A A A A
switching frequency
Output frequency
6
C1-07 C1-01 C1-02 C1-08
Acceleration/Deceleration Times 1 (C1-01 and C1-02) are used when the output frequency C1-11
Acceleration/Deceleration Times 4 (C1-07 and C1-08) are used when the output frequency < C1-11
Prohibition of re-
b1-04 0, 1 0 B B B B
verse operation
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Allows reverse operation.
1 Prohibits reverse operation.
6 - 11
Basic Operation
6.1.7 Selecting the Stopping Method: b1-03
Stopping method
b1-03 0 to 3 0 Q Q Q Q
selection
Run command
ON OFF
Output frequency
Deceleration DC injection braking
time
Excitation level (b2-01)
Run command
ON OFF
Output frequency
The inverter output is shut OFF when the stop command
is input and the run command goes OFF.
Output frequency
when the stop
Min. baseblock time b2-04 command is input
(L2-03) DC injection braking time
10 % 100% (Max. frequency)
After the stop command is input and the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) has elapsed, DC
injection braking is applied and the motor stopped.
The DC injection braking time depends upon the output frequency when the stop command is
input and the DC injection braking time at stop setting in b2-04, as shown in Figure 6.6.
6 - 12
6.1 Common Settings
IMPORTANT Lengthen the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during stopping. When the
power to an induction motor is turned OFF, the counter-electromotive force generated by the residual magnet-
ic field in the motor can cause an overcurrent to be detected when DC injection braking is applied.
Multi-function input
H1-01 0 to 77 24 B B B B
1 (terminal 3)
Multi-function input
H1-02 0 to 77 14 B B B B
2 (terminal 4)
Multi-function input
6
H1-03 0 to 77 3 (0) B B B B
3 (terminal 5)
Multi-function input
H1-04 0 to 77 4 (3) B B B B
4 (terminal 6)
Multi-function input
H1-05 0 to 77 6 (4) B B B B
5 (terminal 7)
Multi-function input
H1-06 0 to 77 8 (6) B B B B
6 (terminal 8)
D The default settings in parentheses are the default values when the Unit is initialized for 3-wire se-
quence control.
D The constant settings that are used most often are explained below. Refer to chapter 7 Advanced Opera-
tion or the constant tables for details on the other settings.
S 3-wire sequence (forward/reverse run command): Set 0
S Multi-step sped references 1 to 3 and jog command: Set 3 to 6
S Acceleration/Deceleration Time Selectors 1 and 2: Set 7 and 1A
S Emergency Stop: Set 15
S FORWARD and REVERSE JOG References: Set 12 and 13
S Terminal 13/14 Switch: Set 1F
6 - 13
Basic Operation
6.1.8 Multi-function Input Settings: H1-01 through H1-06
Motor speed
6 - 14
6.1 Common Settings
D The following table shows which frequency is selected by each possible combination of multi-step
speed and JOG reference settings.
Terminal 5 Terminal 6 Terminal 7 Terminal 8
Multi-step speed Multi-step speed Multi-step speed Selected frequency
JOG reference
reference 1 reference 2 reference 3
Reference 1: d1-01 (master
OFF OFF OFF OFF
speed frequency)
Reference 2: d1-02 (auxilia-
ON OFF OFF OFF
ry speed frequency)
OFF ON OFF OFF Reference 3: d1-03
ON ON OFF OFF Reference 4: d1-04
OFF OFF ON OFF Reference 5: d1-05
ON OFF ON OFF Reference 6: d1-06
OFF ON ON OFF Reference 7: d1-07
ON ON ON OFF Reference 8: d1-08
ON Jog frequency: d1-09
Reference 7
Reference 6
Reference 5
6
Frequency Reference 4
reference
Reference 3
Reference 2
Auxiliary speed
JOG frequency
Reference 1
Master speed
RUN/STOP ON OFF
JOG reference
OFF ON
Fig 6.10 Timing Chart for Multi-step Speed and JOG References
6 - 15
Basic Operation
6.1.8 Multi-function Input Settings: H1-01 through H1-06
d1-02
d1-01
Output frequency
OPEN CLOSED
Forward/reverse run
command,
terminal 1 or 2
OPEN CLOSED
Multi-step speed reference
1, terminal 5
OPEN CLOSED
Multi-step speed reference
2, terminal 6
D Connections
VS-616G5
R R U
S S V IM
T T W
Forward Run/Stop 1
Reverse Run/Stop 2
6 Multi-step speed 5
reference 1
6
Multi-step speed
reference 2
11
6 - 16
6.1 Common Settings
D The following table shows which acceleration and deceleration times are selected by each possible
combination of acceleration/deceleration time selectors 1 and 2. The acceleration and deceleration
times can be changed while the Inverter is operating.
Accel/Decel Time Se- Accel/Decel Time Se- Acceleration Time Deceleration Time
lector 1 lector 2
OFF or not set OFF or not set Acceleration time 1 Deceleration time 1
(C1-01) (C1-02)
ON OFF or not set Acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2
(C1-03) (C1-04)
OFF or not set ON Acceleration time 3 Deceleration time 3
(C1-05) (C1-06)
ON ON Acceleration time 4 Deceleration time 4
(C1-07) (C1-08)
D The forward jog and reverse jog commands have priority over other frequency reference commands.
D The inverter will stop operation with the stopping method set in b1-03 if the forward jog and reverse
jog commands are both ON for more than 500 ms.
D Turn ON either the forward jog command or the reverse jog command, not both.
D These jog commands can operate the Inverter independently. It isnt necessary for a forward/reverse
run command to be input.
J Terminal 13/14 Switch: 1F
D When this function is set for a multi-function input, that input terminal can be used to switch between
terminal 13 and terminal 14.
OFF The analog input from terminal 13 is used as the master-speed frequency reference.
ON The analog input from terminal 14 is used as the master speed frequency reference.
D When terminal 14 is used as the frequency reference, set 1F (frequency reference) in constant H3-09;
this constant is the function selector for frequency reference (current) terminal 14. A setting fault
(OPE03) will occur if this function is selected without setting 1F in H3-09.
D When H3-09 is set to 1F (frequency reference) but none of the multi-function inputs is set to 1F
(terminal 13/14 switch), the sum of the inputs from terminals 13 and 14 will be used as the master-
speed frequency reference.
6 - 17
Basic Operation
6.2.1 Autotuning
6.2.1 Autotuning
CAUTION
D Do not connect a load to the motor when performing autotuning.
Doing so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, motor constants can be set by calculation. Contact your
Yaskawa representatives for details.
D The voltage settings shown in parentheses are the values for the 400 V class. This setting is used as
the reference value for functions such as the protection functions.
J Motor Selection: E1-02
D Set the type of motor being used. This setting is a reference for overheating protection functions.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Motor selection
E1-02 (motor overheating 0 to 2 0 Q Q Q Q
protection)
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Standard motor (general-purpose motor)
1 Special motor (inverter-exclusive motor)
2 Special motor (vector-exclusive motor)
6 - 18
6.2 Open-loop Vector Control
Rated Frequency*
Set the rated frequency (Hz) shown on the motor nameplate.
Rated Speed
Set the rated speed (r/min) shown on the motor nameplate.
Number of Poles
Set the number of poles.
Motor Selection
Select motor 1 or motor 2. (Normally select motor 1.)
2. The following massage will appear when the constants have been set:
3. At this point, it is still possible to change the constant settings by pressing the Increment and Decre-
ment Keys to display the desired constant.
4. Press the STOP Key to cancel autotuning, and then press the MENU Key and DATA/ENTER Key. The
operation mode display will appear.
*There are differences between simple and advanced settings. Refer to the table below.
Operator Display Simple Settings (motor name- Detailed Settings
plate ratings)
Rated Voltage Rated motor voltage Non-load voltage at rated revolu-
tions
Rated Frequency Rated motor frequency Frequency without load at rated rev-
olutions
The motor test reports, design data, and other detailed data is required to make detailed settings.
J Performing Autotuning
D Autotuning will start if the RUN Key is pressed when the Tuning Ready? message is being dis-
played.
D The motor will operate during autotuning, so be sure that it is safe for the motor to operate before press-
D
ing the RUN Key.
The following message will be displayed when the RUN Key is pressed:
6
Tune Proceeding The Tune Proceeding message will blink.
V Hz VVVV A
D Autotuning takes up to 1.5 minutes. The messageTune Successful will be displayed when autotun-
ing has been completed.
D If autotuning has been completed successfully, press the MENU Key and proceed to the next operation.
D If a fault occurred during autotuning, refer to 6.2.2 Autotuning Faults for details on correcting the cause
of the fault and perform autotuning again.
6.2.2 Autotuning Faults
D One of the fault messages in the following table will be displayed if a fault occurs during autotuning
and the motor will stop. In this case, determine the cause of the fault, correct it, and perform autotuning
again.
D The fault display can be cleared by pressing the MENU Key.
D The motor constants will revert to their default settings if a fault occurs. Set these constants again be-
fore starting autotuning again.
6 - 19
Basic Operation
6.2.2 Autotuning Faults
ALARM: Over Load The effective load factor ex- There was a setting fault dur- Check the rated current setting. Change if
ceeded 20% during g autotun- ing autotuning. necessary.
(Excessive tuning load) i
ing.
Turn the Inverter off and rotate the motor by
There is a motor bearing
hand.
problem.
Replace the motor if it doesnt turn smoothly.
There is a broken/discon- Check and replace wiring components if nec-
Motor speed The torque reference value nected motor power wire. essary.
exceeded 100% during auto-
auto
(Motor speed fault) tuning. A load is connected to the
Remove the load.
motor.
The torque limit function is Initialize the torque limit constants (H7-01 to
operating. H7-04).
Accelerate The motor doesnt accelerate The acceleration time is too
Increase acceleration time 1 (C1-01).
(Acceleration fault) within the prescribed
p time. short.
A load is connected to the
Remove the load.
motor.
6 - 20
6.3 V/f Control
D The voltage settings shown in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters.
D This setting is used as a reference value for functions such as the protection functions.
J Motor Selection and Rated Current: E1-02, E2-01
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Standard motor (general-purpose motor)
1 Special motor (inverter-exclusive motor) 6
2 Special motor (vector-exclusive motor)
* 1. The setting range is 10) to 200% of the Inverter rated output current.
* 2. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. Refer to pages 8 - 47 and 8 - 49.
6 - 21
6.3.2 V/f Pattern Selection: E1-03
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D The factory setting for E1-03 is F (user-defined V/f pattern), but the default contents of this setting
are the same as setting 1.
J Selecting a Preset V/f Pattern: E1-03 = 0 through E
D Refer to the following table to set one of the 15 preset patterns.
Characteristics Applications Setting Specifications
These patterns are for general-purpose 0 50 Hz
applications
applications.
1 60 Hz
Fixed torque Use these patterns when the load torque
is to remain constant for any rotational 2 60 Hz, Voltage saturation at 50 Hz
speed such as in straight-line convey-
speed,
ors. 3 72 Hz, Voltage saturation at 60 Hz
4 50 Hz, cubic
Use these
U th patterns
tt when
h ththere iis a qua-
dratic or cubic relationship between the 5 50 Hz, quadratic
Variable torque
rotational speed and load, such as in 6 60 Hz, cubic
fans or pumps
pumps.
7 60 Hz, quadratic
Select a high starting torque V/f pattern
only in the following cases: 8 50 Hz, low starting torque
S The wiring distance between the In In-
verter and motor is relatively large
9 50 Hz, high starting torque
6 High starting
torque*
(greater than 150 m).
S A large torque is required at startup
(such as for heavy axis loads).
A 60 Hz, low starting torque
S An AC or DC reactor is connected to
the Inverters input or output
output.
S A motor less than the maximum appli- b 60 Hz, high starting torque
cable motor is being used.
* Normally it isnt necessary to use these patterns because starting torque is ensured by auto-
matic torque boost functions.
D The constant settings for E1-04 through E1-10 will be changed automatically when one of these pat-
terns is selected. There are three possible settings for these constants depending on the Inverters ca-
pacity:
A 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern
A 2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern
A 55 to 300 kW V/f pattern
D The characteristics for these patterns are shown in the diagrams on the following pages.
6 - 22
6.3 V/f Control
15 15 15
15
9 9 9
9
0 1.3 2.5 50 (Hz) 0 1.5 3 60 (Hz) 0 1.5 3 50 60 (Hz) 0 1.5 3 (Hz) 60 72
50 50
35 35
9 9
8 8
0 1.3 25 50 (Hz) 0 1.3 25 50 (Hz) 0 1.5 30 60 (Hz) 0 1.5 30 60 (Hz)
24 24
19 19
15
11 13
11
0 1.3 2.5 50 (Hz) 0 1.3 2.5 50 (Hz) 0 1.5 3 60 (Hz) 0 1.5 3 60 (Hz)
15 15 15
9 9 9
0 1.5 3 60 90 0 1.5 3 (Hz) 60 120 0 1.5 3 60 180
(Hz) (Hz)
The voltages above are for 200 V class Inverters. Double the voltages for 400 V class Inverters.
6 - 23
6.3.2 V/f Pattern Selection: E1-03
14 14 14 14
7 7 7 7
50 50
35 35
7 7
6 6
0 1.3 25 50 (Hz) 0 1.3 25 50 (Hz) 0 1.5 30 60 (Hz) 0 1.5 30 60 (Hz)
23 23
18 18
11 13
9 9
0 1.3 2.5 50 (Hz) 0 1.3 2.5 50 (Hz) 0 1.5 3 60 (Hz) 0 1.5 3 60 (Hz)
14 14 14
7 7 7
0 1.5 3 (Hz) 60 90 0 1.5 3 (Hz) 60 120 0 1.5 3 (Hz) 60 180
The voltages above are for 200 V class Inverters. Double the voltages for 400 V class Inverters.
6 - 24
6.3 V/f Control
12 12 12 12
6 6 6 6
50 50
35 35
6 6
5 5
0 1.3 25 50 (Hz) 0 1.3 25 50 (Hz) 0 1.5 30 60 (Hz) 0 1.5 30 60 (Hz)
20 20
15 15
9 11
7 7
0 1.3 2.5 50 (Hz) 0 1.3 2.5 50 (Hz) 0 1.5 3 60 (Hz) 0 1.5 3 60 (Hz)
12 12 12
6 6 6
0 1.5 3 (Hz) 60 90 0 1.5 3 (Hz) 60 120 0 1.5 3 (Hz) 60 180
The voltages above are for 200 V class Inverters. Double the voltages for 400 V class Inverters.
6 - 25
6.3.2 V/f Pattern Selection: E1-03
* 1. These values are for the 200 V class; double the values for 400 V class Inverters.
* 2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The factory settings shown in the table
are for 200 V class, 0.4 to 1.5 kW Inverters. (See page 8 - 47.)
Refer to the graphs for Setting: 1 on pages 6 - 24 and 6 - 25.
* 3. If E1-13 is set to 0.0, E1-13 will be set to the same value as E1-05 following autotuning and
does not need to be set.
D The factory settings for E1-07 through E1-10 will be set according to the control method whenever
the control method is changed. The factory settings shown in the table are for V/f control. See page
8 - 45.)
D The four frequency settings must satisfy the following formula:
E1-04 (FMAX) E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) E1-09 (FMIN)
6 - 26
6.3 V/f Control
VBASE
(E1-13)
VC
(E1-08)
VMIN
(E1-10)
Frequency (Hz)
FMIN FB FA FMAX
(E1-09) (E1-07) (E1-06) (E1-04)
6 - 27
Basic Operation
6.4.1 PG Speed Control Card Settings
D Select the Card according to the application and install it in the Inverter as described in 3.7 Installing
and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards.
J PG Constant: F1-01
D Set the PG (pulse generator or encoder) constant in pulses/revolution.
D Set the number of phase-A or phase-B pulses in one motor revolution.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Loop
6
Control PG Vector
tion Vector
F1-05 PG rotation 0, 1 0 B B
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Phase A leads with forward rotation. (Phase B leads with reverse rotation.)
1 Phase B leads with forward rotation. (Phase A leads with reverse rotation.)
6 - 28
6.4 Flux Vector Control
Forward
Pulse output
[Setting: 0] [Setting: 1]
Phase A Phase A
Phase B Phase B
D Forward rotation in a typical motor (applicable Yaskawa PG: made by Thermtac):
The motor output shaft rotates in
the counterclockwise direction
Forward with a forward inverter reference.
Forward rotation
Phase A
Phase B
D Phase A leading in a typical PG:
Phase A leads when the input axis rotates clockwise.
Phase A
Phase B
Fig 6.12 PG Rotation Direction Setting
D The first digit in the setting (0 or 1) is n and the second two digits (01 to 32) are m. The division ratio
is calculated from n and m with the following equation:
Division ratio = ( 1 + n )/m Setting Ranges n: 0, 1 m: 1 to 32
F1-06 = j jj
n m
D Possible division rate settings are as follows: 1/32 F1-06 1. For example, if the division rate is
1/2 (a setting of 2), the monitor output will be half of the number of pulses output from the PG.
J Fault Detection Functions: F1-02 to F1-04, F1-08 to F1-11, F1-14
Operation selection
F1-02 0 to 3 1 B B
at PG open circuit
PG open-circuit
F1-14 0.0 to 10.0 s 2.0 A A
detection time
6 - 29
Basic Operation
6.4.1 PG Speed Control Card Settings
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Deceleration to stop using deceleration time 1 (C1-02).
1 Coast to stop
2 Emergency stop using the emergency-stop time (C1-09).
3 Continue operation (To protect the motor and machinery, this is not normally set.)
Operation selection
F1-03 0 to 3 1 B B
at overspeed
Overspeed detection
F1-08 0 to 120 % 115 A A
level
Overspeed detection
F1-09 0.0 to 2.0 s 0.0 A A
delay time
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Deceleration to stop using deceleration time 1 (C1-02).
1 Coast to stop
2 Emergency stop using the emergency-stop time (C1-09).
3 Continue operation (To protect the motor and machinery, this is not normally set.)
Operation selection
F1-04 0 to 7 3 B B
at deviation
Excessive speed
F1-10 deviation detection 0 to 50 % 10 A A
level
Excessive speed
F1-11 deviation detection 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.5 A A
delay time
D Settings (F1-04)
Setting Function
0 Deceleration to stop using deceleration time 1 (C1-02).*1
1 Coast to stop*1
2 Emergency stop using the emergency-stop time (C1-09).*1
3 Continue operation (Displays DEV and continues control.)*1
4 Deceleration t to stop using deceler action time 1 ( C102)*2
5 Coast to stop *2
6 - 30
6.4 Flux Vector Control
Setting Function
6 Emergency stop using the emergencystop time (C109)*2
7 Continue Operation (Displays DEV and continues control )*2
* 1. Speed agreement conditions: The frequency reference and output frequency were entered
in the speed agree detection width set in L402.
* 2. Speed agreement conditions: The frequency reference and the (actual) motor speed based
on the PG feedback value were entered in the speed agree detevtion width set in L402.
D F1-10 and F1-11 Settings
Constant F1-10 sets the PG speed deviation detection level as a percentage of the maximum output
frequency. Constant F1-11 sets the length of time in seconds that the difference between the motor
speed and reference speed must exceed the PG speed deviation detection level in order to detect a PG
speed deviation (DEV).
6.4.2 Setting the Zero-speed Operation Constants
D With flux vector control, operation is possible even when the frequency reference is zero (below the
minimum output frequency).
D Set the operation methods for the minimum output frequency.
J Stopping Method Selection: b1-03
D Set the stopping method used when a stop command is input.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Deceleration to stop
1 Coast to stop
2 DC injection braking stop (This setting cant be made with flux vector control.) 6
3 Coast to stop with timer (This setting cant be made with flux vector control.)
Operation selection
b1-05 for setting of E1-09 0 to 3 0 A
or less
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Operate according to the frequency reference. (E1-09 is invalid.)
1 Interrupt the output. (Coast when the frequency reference is below E1-09.)
2 Operate at E1-09 frequency. (Output the frequency set in E1-09.)
3 Zero-speed operation (Zero reference value when the frequency reference is below E1-09.)
6 - 31
Basic Operation
6.4.2 Setting the Zero-speed Operation Constants
D With flux vector control, the DC injection braking function is replaced by the initial excitation function
and zero speed function.
D The timing of the initial excitation function depends on the zero-speed operation method selected in
b1-05 (zero-speed operation), as shown in Figure 6.13.
D The initial excitation function stops a motor that is rotating because of inertia.
ON
OFF
Run command
Frequency reference
from analog input E1-09
0
Inverter internal frequency reference
(Soft start input)
After the run command goes
6 D b1-05 = 0
(RUN at Frequency Initial
OFF, zero-speed control is per-
formed for the time set in b2-04
Ref) excitation when the motor speed drops be-
low b2-01.
BB (Baseblock) BB
BB BB
After the run command goes
D b1-05 = 2 OFF, zero-speed control is
(RUN at Min Frequency) performed for the time set in
Initial
b2-04 when the motor speed
excitation
drops below b2-01.
BB BB
After the run command goes
D b1-05 = 3 OFF, zero-speed control is
(RUN at Zero RPM) performed for the time set in
Initial b2-04 when the motor
excitation speed drops below b2-01.
D Initial excitation is started from b2-01 (zero speed level) when decelerating. A setting of b2-01 < E1-09
is valid only with flux vector control.
D The current level for the initial excitation function is set in E2-03 (motor no-load current).
D The DC injection braking current (b2-02) isnt used with flux vector control and cant be set.
6 - 32
6.4 Flux Vector Control
6.4.3 Autotuning
CAUTION
D Do not connect a load to the motor when performing autotuning.
Doing so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
D The voltage settings shown in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters.
D This setting is used as the reference value for functions such as the protection functions.
J Motor Selection (Motor Overheating Protection): E1-02
D Set the type of motor being used. This setting is a reference for overheating protection functions.
User Change
g
during Setting Factory
Valid Access Levels 6
Constant Name Unit V/f V/f with Open Flux
Number Opera- Range Setting Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Standard motor (general-purpose motor)
1 Special motor (inverter-exclusive motor)
2 Special motor (vector-exclusive motor)
6 - 33
Basic Operation
6.4.3 Autotuning
PG Pulses/Rev:
Set the number of A-phase or B-phase pulses per revolution.
2. The following message will appear when the constants have been set:
3. At this point, it is still possible to change the constant settings by pressing the Increment and Decre-
ment Keys to display the desired constant.
4. Press the STOP Key to cancel autotuning, and then press the MENU Key and DATA/ENTER Key. The
operation mode display will appear.
* There are differences between simple and advanced settings. Refer to the table below.
Operator Display Simple Settings (motor name- Detailed Settings
plate ratings)
Rated Voltage Rated motor voltage Non-load voltage at rated revolu-
tions
Rated Frequency Rated motor frequency Frequency without load at rated rev-
olutions
The motor test reports, design data, and other detailed data is required to make detailed settings.
6 - 34
6.4 Flux Vector Control
J Performing Autotuning
D Autotuning will start if the Run Key is pressed when the Tuning Ready? message is being displayed.
D The motor will operate during autotuning, so be sure that it is safe for the motor to operate before press-
ing the Run Key.
D The following message will be displayed when the Run Key is pressed:
D Autotuning takes up to 1.5 minutes. The messageTune Successful will be displayed when autotun-
ing is completed.
D If autotuning has been completed successfully, press the Menu Key and proceed to the next operation.
D If a fault occurred during autotuning, refer to Table 6.3 Autotuning Faults for details on correcting the
cause of the fault and perform autotuning again.
J Autotuning Faults
D One of the fault messages in the following table will be displayed if a fault occurs during autotuning
and the motor will stop. In this case, determine the cause of the fault, correct it, and perform autotuning
again.
D The fault display can be cleared by pressing the MENU Key.
D The motor constants will revert to their default settings if a fault occurs. Set these constants again be-
fore starting autotuning again.
Table 6.3 Troubleshooting Autotuning Faults for Open-loop Vector Control
Fault Display Probable Cause Remedy
There was a fault in the rela- Change the settings to conform to the follow-
Data Invalid There was a fault in the data tionship between the rated ing equation:
(Motor data fault) set during autotuning. frequency, rated speed, and Rated speed < 120 Motor frequency/Num-
number of poles. ber of poles
A load is connected to the
Remove the load.
motor shaft.
6 - 35
Basic Operation
6.4.4 Speed Control (ASR) Structure
In vector flux control, the ASRs P gain is the maximum frequency standard.
6 User
Constant Name
Change
g
during
Opera-
Setting
Range
Unit Factory
Setting V/f
Valid Access Levels
V/f with Open Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
6 - 36
6.4 Flux Vector Control
D Figure 6.15 shows how the proportional gain and integral time approach the ASR proportional gain
2 and ASR integral time 2 linearly.
P, I
P= C5-01
I = C5-02
P= C5-03
I = C5-04 (Low speed)
C5-02 C5-02
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
6 - 37
Basic Operation
6.4.5 Speed Control (ASR) Gain
J Fine Adjustments
D When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform.
D Constant settings like those shown in the following table will be necessary to monitor the speed wave-
form.
Constant Setting Explanation
6 H4-01 Analog output selection (terminal 21) 2
Settings that allow multi-function
H4-02 Analog output gain (terminal 21) 1.00 analogg output
p 1 to be used to mon-
it th
itor the output
t t frequency.
f
H4-03 Analog output bias (terminal 21) 0.0
H4-04 Analog output selection (terminal 23) 5
Settings that allow multi-function
H4-05 Analog output gain (terminal 23) 1.00 analogg output
p 2 to be used to mon-
it th
itor the motor
t speed.d
H4-06 Analog output bias (terminal 23) 0.0
This setting allows a 0 to 10 V
H4-07 Analog output level selection 1
signal range to be monitored.
D The multi-function analog outputs have the following functions with these constant settings.
Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal 21): Outputs Inverters output frequency (0 to 10 V).
Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal 23): Outputs actual motor speed (0 to 10 V).
Terminal 22 is the multi-function analog output common.
D We recommend monitoring both the output frequency and the motor speed to monitor the response
delay or deviations from the reference value, as shown in the following diagram.
Output frequency
Motor speed
Time
6 - 38
6.4 Flux Vector Control
Time
6
Long integral time
Time
6 - 39
Basic Operation
6.5.1 Motor Constants: E1-01, E1-02, E2-01, E2-04
D The voltage settings shown in parentheses are the values for the 400 V class.
D This setting is used as the reference value for functions such as the protection functions.
J Motor Selection: E1-02, E2-01, E2-04
D Settings
6 Setting
0 Standard motor (general-purpose motor)
Function
10% to 200
Motor rated current
% *2
E2-01 (electronic thermal A Q Q Q Q
(of rated
reference current)
current)*1
* 1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current.
* 2. The factory setting depends upon the type of Inverter. Refer to pages 8 - 47 and 8 - 49.
Number of motor
E2-04 2 to 48 4 Q Q
poles
6 - 40
6.5 V/f Control with PG
D The factory setting for E1-03 is F (user-defined V/f pattern), but the default contents of this setting
are the same as setting 1.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
* Normally it isnt necessary to use these patterns because starting torque is ensured by auto-
matic torque boost functions.
D The constant settings for E1-04 through E1-10 will be changed automatically when one of these pat-
terns is selected. There are three possible settings for these constants depending on the Inverters ca-
pacity:
A 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern
A 2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern
A 55 to 300 kW V/f pattern
D The characteristics for these patterns are shown in the diagrams on pages 6 - 23 through 6 - 25.
J Setting a User-defined V/f Pattern: E1-03 = F
D Constants E1-04 through E1-10 can be set by the user when E1-03 has been set to F.
D Refer to page 6 - 26 for details on setting these constants.
6 - 41
Basic Operation
6.5.3 PG Speed Control Card Settings
D Select the Card according to the application and install it in the Inverter as described in 3.7 Installing
and Wiring PG Speed Control Cards.
J Setting the PG Pulse Number: F1-01
D Set the PG (pulse generator or encoder) pulse number in pulses/revolution.
D Set the number of phase A or phase B pulses in one motor revolution.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
6 F1-12
Number of PG gear
teeth 1
0 to 1000 0 A
Number of PG gear
F1-13 0 to 1000 0 A
teeth 2
D A gear ratio of 1 (F1-12 = F1-13 = 1) will be used if either of these constants is set to 0.
J Selecting Integral Operation During Acceleration/Deceleration: F1-07
D When V/f control with PG feedback is used, integral control during acceleration and deceleration
can be enabled or disabled with F1-07.
D Set F1-07 to 1 (integral control enabled) if you want to keep the motor speed as close to the frequency
reference as possible during acceleration and deceleration. Set F1-07 to 0 (integral control disabled)
if you want to prevent the occurrence of overshooting/undershooting.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disabled (The integral function isnt used while accelerating or decelerating; it is used at
constant speeds.)
1 Enabled (The integral function is used at all times.)
6 - 42
6.5 V/f Control with PG
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Operation selection
F1-02 0 to 3 1 B B
at PG open circuit
PG open-circuit
F1-14 0.0 to 10.0 s 2.0 A A
detection time
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Deceleration to stop using deceleration time 1 (C1-02).
1 Coast to stop
2 Emergency stop using the emergency-stop time (C1-09).
3 Continue operation (Display PGO and continue operation with V/f control.)
Operation selection
F1-03 0 to 3 1 B B
at overspeed
Overspeed detection
F1-08 0 to 120 % 115 A A
level
Overspeed detection
F1-09 0.0 to 2.0 s 1.0 A A
delay time
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Deceleration to stop using deceleration time 1 (C1-02). 6
1 Coast to stop
2 Emergency stop using the emergency-stop time (C1-09).
3 Continue operation (Display OS and continue control.)
Operation selection
F1-04 0 to 7 3 B B
at deviation
Excessive speed
F1-10 deviation detection 0 to 50 % 10 A A
level
Excessive speed
F1-11 deviation detection 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.5 A A
delay time
6 - 43
Basic Operation
6.5.4 Speed Control (ASR) Structure
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Deceleration to stop using deceleration time 1 (C1-02).
1 Coast to stop
2 Emergency stop using the emergency-stop time (C1-09).
3 Continue operation (Display DEV and continue control.)
4 Deceleration t to stop using deceler action time 1 ( c102)*2
5 Coast to stop *2
6 Emergency stop using the emergencystop time (c109)*2
7 Continue Operation (Displays DEV and continues control )*2
* 1. Speed agreement conditions: The frequency reference and output frequency were entered
in the speed agree detection width set in L402.
* 2. Speed agreement conditions: The frequency reference and the (actual) motor speed based
on the PG feedback value were entered in the speed agree detection width set in L402.
D F1-10 and F1-11 Settings
Constant F1-10 sets the PG speed deviation detection level as a percentage of the maximum output
frequency. Constant F1-11 sets the length of time in seconds that the difference between the motor
speed and reference speed must exceed the PG speed deviation detection level in order to detect a PG
speed deviation (DEV).
6.5.4 Speed Control (ASR) Structure
D The following block diagram shows the structure of the speed control.
Frequency +
reference + Output fre-
quency
+ Change +
Detected limiter P Limiter
speed +
C5-01, C5-03 C5-05
I
C5-02, C5-04
6 Fig 6.21 Speed Control Structure
J Gain Settings
D When using V/f control with PG feedback, set the gain at the minimum output frequency and maxi-
mum output frequency.
Max. Output Frequency Gain Settings: C5-01, C5-02
D Set the proportional gain (C5-01) and the integral time (C5-02) of the speed control (ASR).
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
6 - 44
6.5 V/f Control with PG
D Figure 6.22 shows how the proportional gain and integral time are calculated from constants C5-01
through C5-04.
P, I P= C5-01
I = C5-02
P= C5-03
I = C5-04 (Min. output frequency)
6 - 45
Basic Operation
6.5.5 Adjusting Speed Control (ASR) Gain
The multi-function analog outputs have the following functions with these constant settings.
Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal 21): Outputs Inverters output frequency(0 to 10 V).
Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal 23): Outputs the actual motor speed (0 to 10 V).
Terminal 22 is the multi-function analog output common.
We recommend monitoring both the output frequency and the motor speed to monitor the response
delay or deviations from the reference value, as shown in the following diagram.
Output frequency
Motor speed
Time
3. Give acceleration/deceleration commands and adjust the gain while observing the waveform.
If overshooting occurs:
Decrease C5-01 and increase C5-02.
Motor speed
6 Time
If undershooting occurs:
Decrease C5-03 and increase C5-04.
4. If the overshooting or undershooting cant be eliminated by adjusting the gain, decrease the ASR limit
(C5-05) to lower the frequency reference compensation limit.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Since C5-05 cant be changed during operation, stop the Inverters operation and then decrease
the ASR limit by 0.5 (%).
Perform step 3 again after the setting has been changed.
The ASR limit is the frequency limit for compensation by speed control. Set this frequency limit
as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
If the frequency limit is lowered too much, the motor speed might not reach the target speed. Verify
that the target speed is reached during normal operation.
6 - 46
7
Advanced Operation
This chapter describes the user constants used for specific control methods
in VS-616G5 application.
7-1
Advanced Operation
Open-loop Vector
Group Function Comments
Flux Vector
V/f w/PG
V/f
b1 Sequence Settings such as the reference input method f f f f
b2 DC Injection Braking DC injection braking function settings f f f f
b3 Speed Search Speed search function settings f f f f
b4 Delay Timers Timer function settings f f f f
b Application b5 PID Control PID control settings f f f f
b6 Dwell Functions Acceleration/deceleration time dwell function settings f f f f
b7 Droop Control Not used. (Cant be set.) f
b8 Energy Saving Not used. (Cant be set.) f f
b9 Zero Servo Not used. (Cant be set.) f
C1 Accel/Decel Acceleration/deceleration time settings f f f f
C2 S-Curve Acc/Dec S-curve characteristics for acceleration/deceleration times f f f f
C3 Motor-Slip Compensation L Slip compensation function settings f f f f
C4 Torque Compensation L Torque compensation function settings f f f
C Tuning
C5 Speed Controls Not used. (Cant be set.) f f
C6 Carrier Frequency Carrier frequency settings f f f f
C7 Hunting Prevention Not used. (Cant be set.) f f
C8 Factory Tuning L Adjustment for open-loop vector control f
d1 Preset Reference Frequency reference settings (when using Operator) f f f f
d2 Reference Limits Frequency upper and lower limit settings f f f f
d3 Jump Frequencies Prohibited frequency settings f f f f
d Reference
Reference Frequency Hold
d4 Up/Down, Accel/Decel stop hold frequency setting f f f f
Function
d5 Torque Control Not used. (Cant be set.) f
E1 V/f Pattern L Motor constant settings f f f f
7 E Motor
E2
E3
Motor Setup
Motor 2 Control Methods
(Motor constants are set by the autotuning function.)
Control method settings for motor 2.
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
E4 Motor 2 V/f Characteristics V/f characteristics settings for motor 2. f f f f
E5 Motor 2 Motor Constants Motor constant settings for motor 2. f f f f
PG speed control card set-
F1 User constant settings for a PG Card f f
tings
F2 Analog Reference Card AI User constant settings for an Analog Reference Card f f f f
F3 Digital Reference Card DI User constant settings for a Digital Reference Card f f f f
F4 Analog Monitor Card AO User constant settings for an Analog Monitor Card f f f f
F5 Digital Output Card DO User constant settings for a Digital Output Card f f f f
F Options
F6 Digital Output Card DO User constant settings for a Digital Output Card f f f f
F7 Pulse Monitor Card PO User constant settings for a Pulse Monitor Card f f f f
SI-F/SI-G Transmission
F8 User constant settings for a Transmission Card f f f f
Card
Transmission Cards other
F9 User constant settings for a Transmission Card f f f f
than SI-K2 and SI-F/G
H1 Multi-function Inputs Function selection for multi-function inputs f f f f
H2 Multi-function Outputs Function selection for multi-function outputs f f f f
H3 Analog Inputs Function selection for analog inputs f f f f
H Terminal
T i l Multi-function Analog Out-
H4 Function selection for analog outputs f f f f
puts
MEMOBUS Communica-
H5 MEMOBUS communications settings f f f f
tions
7-2
7.1 Open-loop Vector Control
Control Meth-
od
Open-loop Vector
Group Function Comments
Flux Vector
V/f w/PG
V/f
L1 Motor Protection Functions Sets thermal functions that protect the motor. f f f f
L2 Power Loss Ridethru Selects the power-loss processing method. f f f f
L3 Stall Prevention Accel/Decel stall prevention settings and selection f f f f
L4 Reference Detection Frequency detection settings and selection f f f f
L Protection
L5 Fault Restart Fault restart function settings f f f f
L6 Torque Detection Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 (by torque) f f f f
L7 Torque Limit L Four-quadrant individual torque limit settings f f
L8 Hardware Protection Hardware overheating and open-phase protection settings f f f f
o1 Monitor Select Selects the Operators display and setting methods. f f f f
o Operator
o2 Key Selections Operators key function selection and other constants f f f f
7-3
Advanced Operation
7.1.1 Torque Limit Function
IMPORTANT The accuracy of the torque limit is 5% for output frequencies above 10 Hz, but the accuracy is lower for
output frequencies below 10 Hz. Use flux vector control if you want to apply a torque limit at low-speed (be-
low 10 Hz), or rotate the motor in the reverse direction.
7 Forward direction
L7-01
L7-04
Regenerative
torque Motor speed
Reverse Forward
Regenerative
torque
L7-03
L7-02
Reverse direction
Fig 7.1 Torque Limit Function
Multi-function ana-
H3-05 log input (terminal 0 to 1F 0 B B B B
16)
Multi-function ana-
H3-09 log input (terminal 1 to 1F 1F A A A A
14)
7-4
7.1 Open-loop Vector Control
D Settings
Setting Name
10 Forward Torque Limit
11 Reverse Torque Limit
12 Regenerative Torque Limit
15 Forward/Reverse Torque Limit
D The above table shows only those settings related to the torque limit function.
D Set the analog input terminals signal level, gain, and bias to match the actual input signal.
D The factory settings for the input terminals signal level are as follows:
Terminal 16: 0 to 10 V (A 10 V input limits the torque to 100% of the motors rated torque.)
Terminal 14: 4 to 20 mA (A 20 mA input limits the torque to 100% of the motors rated torque.)
Figure 7.2 shows the relationship between the output torque and each torque limit.
Output torque
Forward direction
Reverse direction
D When the forward torque limit has been set, the analog input signal acts as the limit value for torque
generated in the forward direction. The torque limit input is effective when torque is generated in the
forward direction even if the motor is operating in reverse (regenerative torque).
D The torque limit is 100% of the motors rated torque when the analog input is at its maximum value
(10 V or 20 mA). To increase the torque limit above 100%, set the input terminals gain above 100%.
For example, a gain of 150.0% would result in a torque limit of 150% of the motors rated torque with
a 10 V or 20 mA analog input.
Gain for multi-function analog input, terminal 16: H3-06
Gain for frequency reference (current), terminal 14: H3-10
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
0.00 to Mul-
C8-08 AFR gain 1.00 A
10.00 tiple
7-5
Advanced Operation
7.1.3 Setting/Adjusting Motor Constants
* 1. These voltages are for 200 V class Inverters; double the voltage for 400 V class Inverters.
* 2. The default setting depends on the Inverters capacity. The default settings shown in the table
are for 200 V class, 0.4 to 1.5 kW Inverters. (See page 8 - 47.)
Note 1.The default settings for E1-07 through E1-10 depend on the control method. The default
settings shown in the table are for open-loop vector control. (See page 8 - 45.)
2. The four frequency settings must satisfy the following formula:
E1-04 (FMAX) E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) E1-09 (FMIN)
7 3. When making the V/f characteristics a straight line, set the same value in E1-07 (middle
output frequency) and E1-09 (minimum output frequency). In this case, constant E1-08
(middle output frequency voltage) will be disregarded.
4. If E1-13 is set to 0.0, the same value as in E1-13 will be set for E1-05. It does not normally
need to be set separately.
VBASE
(E1-13)
VC
(E1-08)
VMIN
(E1-10)
Frequency (Hz)
FMIN FB FA FMAX
(E1-09) (E1-07) (E1-06) (E1-04)
7-6
7.1 Open-loop Vector Control
E2-01
Motor rated current 0.32 to 6.40 A 1.90 Q Q Q Q
(E5-01)
D The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The default setting depends upon
the Inverter capacity. (The table shows the default setting for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.) (See page
8 - 47.)
D Set the rated current (A) shown on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip: E2-02
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
E2-02
Motor rated slip
0.00 to
20.00
Hz 2.90 A A Q Q 7
(E5-02)
7-7
Advanced Operation
7.1.4 Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated
7 D
D
Constants E2-07 and E2-08 are not required when using the motor at or below the rated frequency.
Set these constants when operating at a frequency higher that the motors rated frequency. Set the fol-
lowing values:
Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 1: Core-saturation coefficient when magnetic flux is 50%.
Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 2: Core-saturation coefficient when magnetic flux is 75%.
D Normally these values arent shown on the motor nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the
motor manufacturer. Operation will be possible with the factory-preset values.
7.1.4 Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated
The Inverter cannot output a voltage that is higher than the input voltage. If the output voltage command
to the motor (monitor constant U1-06) exceedes the input voltage in the high-speed region, the output volt-
age will become saturated, and the control unstable with open loop vector control.
Select one of the following methods to prevent this unstable condition.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disables limited output voltage operation.
1 Enables limited output voltage operation.
7-8
7.1 Open-loop Vector Control
D If the limited output voltage operation is disabled and output voltage becomes saturated, slip com-
pensation is automatically disabled to prevent instability.
The output current does not change when the slip compensation is disabled, however precise speed
control is no longer possible. Enable limited output voltage operation if precise speed control is re-
quired.
D If the limited output voltage operation is enabled, the magnetic flux current of the motor is automatical-
ly controlled, and the output voltage command itself is limited, which maintains precise speed control.
Check the Inverter current margins as the output current will be maximum 10% higher (with a rated
load) than when limited output voltage operation is disabled.
Note 1.C3-06 does not need to be changed if the Unit is used only at medium or low speeds, or
when the power supply voltage is 10% or more higher than the rated voltage of the motor,
or when speed control precision in the high-speed region is not required.
2. When the power supply voltage is too low for the rated motor voltage, speed control will
not be precise even if limited output voltage operation is enabled.
7.1.5 Starting Torque Compensation Function (for SPEC:F)
Starting torque compensation can be input to speed up the torque command at starting with open-loop vec-
tor control.
This function is effective for machinery with large friction loads, cranes, and other applications where
starting torque is required. However, this compensation only applies at startup, in contrast to Flux vector
control.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
* The lower limit of Inverters torque value is determined by the above torque
compensation value.
D When this function is used, set the starting torque value to the friction load value for ordinary machin-
ery, and to the load for cranes and other lifting devices.
Friction load: Set the friction load for both C4-03 and C4-04.
Lifting devices: Set the load for the motor side only (hoist). Do not use this function for lifting de-
vices with counterweights as a shock will be generated if there is a regenerative load.
D Compensation can be set only for the motoring side, for both the forward and reverse directions. It can-
not be set for the regenerative side.
D Starting torque compensation is disabled when switching between forward and reverse after conduct-
ing a speed search.
D Starting torque compensation is always disabled when the second motor is used.
7-9
Advanced Operation
7.1.5 Starting Torque Compensation Function (for SPEC:F)
D Set the constant for starting torque compensation (C4-05) to a large value if a shock is generated during
startup.
Alternatively, use DC injection braking (b2-03) at startup or the DC braking command for multifunc-
tion contact input (setting: 60), and start motor magnetic flux before startup.
(Magnetic flux using DC injection braking at start (b2-03) can be started earlier. Refer to Magnetic flux
compensation under 7.5.1 Application Constants: b)
7 - 10
7.2 V/f Control without PG
Open-loop Vector
Group Function Comments
Flux Vector
V/f w/PG
V/f
b1 Sequence Settings such as the reference input method f f f f
b2 DC Injection Braking DC injection braking function settings f f f f
b3 Speed Search Speed search function settings f f f f
b4 Delay Timers Timer function settings f f f f
b Application b5 PID Control PID control settings f f f f
b6 Dwell Functions Acceleration/deceleration time dwell function settings f f f f
b7 Droop Control Not used. (Cant be set.) f
b8 Energy Saving L Multi-function input: Energy-saving control settings f f
b9 Zero Servo Not used. (Cant be set.) f
C1 Accel/Decel Acceleration/deceleration time settings f f f f
C2 S-Curve Acc/Dec S-curve characteristics for accel/decel times f f f f
C3 Motor-Slip Compensation Slip compensation function settings f f f f
C4 Torque Compensation Torque compensation function settings f f f
C Tuning
C5 Speed Controls Not used. (Cant be set.) f f
C6 Carrier Frequency Carrier frequency settings f f f f
C7 Hunting Prevention L Hunting prevention function settings f f
C8 Factory Tuning Not used. (Cant be set.) f
d1 Preset Reference Frequency reference settings (when using Operator) f f f f
d2 Reference Limits Frequency upper and lower limit settings f f f f
d3 Jump Frequencies Prohibited frequency settings f f f f
d Reference
Reference Frequence Hold
d4 Up/Down, Accel/Decel stop hold frequency setting f f f f
Function
d5 Torque Control Not used. (Cant be set.) f
E1 V/f Pattern Motor constant settings f f f f
7
L
E2 Motor Setup (Motor constants set manually.) f f f f
E Motor E3 Motor 2 Control Methods Control method settings for motor 2. f f f f
E4 Motor 2 V/f Characteristics V/f characteristics settings for motor 2. f f f f
E5 Motor 2 Motor Constants Motor constant settings for motor 2. f f f f
PG speed control card set-
F1 Not used. (Cant be set.) f f
tings
F2 Analog Reference Card AI User constant settings for an Analog Reference Card f f f f
F3 Digital Reference Card DI User constant settings for a Digital Reference Card f f f f
F4 Analog Monitor Card AO User constant settings for an Analog Monitor Card f f f f
F5 Digital Output Card DO User constant settings for a Digital Output Card f f f f
F Options
F6 Digital Output Card DO User constant settings for a Digital Output Card f f f f
F7 Pulse Monitor Card PO User constant settings for a Pulse Monitor Card f f f f
SI-F/SI-G Transmission
F8 User constant settings for a Transmission Card f f f f
Card
Transmission Cards other
F9 User constant settings for a Transmission Card f f f f
than SI-K2 and SI-F/G
H1 Multi-function Inputs Function selection for multi-function inputs f f f f
H2 Multi-function Outputs Function selection for multi-function outputs f f f f
H3 Analog Inputs Function selection for analog inputs f f f f
H Terminal
T i l Multi-function Analog Out-
H4 Function selection for analog outputs f f f f
puts
MEMOBUS Communica-
H5 MEMOBUS communications settings
tions
7 - 11
Advanced Operation
Control Meth-
od
Open-loop Vector
Group Function Comments
Flux Vector
V/f w/PG
V/f
L1 Motor Overload Sets electrical/thermal functions that protect the motor. f f f f
L2 Power Loss Ridethru Selects the power-loss processing method. f f f f
L3 Stall Prevention Accel/Decel/Run stall prevention settings and selection f f f f
L4 Ref Detection Frequency detection settings f f f f
L Protection
L5 Fault Restart Fault restart function settings f f f f
L6 Torque Detection Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 (by current) f f f f
L7 Torque Limit Not used. (Cant be set.) f f
L8 Hardware Protection Hardware overheating and open-phase protection settings f f f f
o1 Monitor Select Selects the Operators display and setting methods. f f f f
o Operator
o2 Key Selections Operators key function selection and other constants f f f f
7 - 12
7.2 V/f Control without PG
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Constant b8-01 determines the Inverters output voltage when the energy-saving command is input.
Set this value as a percentage of the V/f patterns voltage.
D Constant L2-04 (the voltage recovery time) determines the rate at which the output voltage is changed
when the energy-saving command is turned ON or OFF.
J Energy-saving Frequency: b8-02
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Energy-saving fre-
b8-02 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 A A
quency
D Constant b8-02 determines the lower limit frequency for the energy-saving function.
D The energy-saving command is enabled only when the frequency reference is above the energy-saving
frequency and the motor speed is within the speed agree range.
A time chart for energy-saving operation is shown below.
OFF ON
Run command
OFF ON
Energy-saving
command
Frequency reference b8-02
(energy-saving frequency) 7
Output frequency
Output voltage
L2-04 E1-03 to E1-10 setting Energy-saving Gain
(Voltage recovery time) (b8-01)
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Hunting prevention
C7-01 0, 1 1 A A
selection
7 - 13
Advanced Operation
7.2.3 Setting Motor Constants
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disables the hunting-prevention function.
1 Enables the hunting-prevention function.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Normally it isnt necessary to change these constants. Adjust these constants as follows if hunting occurs
with a light load.
D Increase the setting in C7-02 if oscillation occurs when operating with a light load.
(If the setting is increased too much, the current can fall to the point where stalling occurs.)
D Decrease the setting in C7-02 if stalling occurs.
D Disable the hunting-prevention function (C7-01 = 0) if high responsiveness is more important than
suppressing oscillation.
7.2.3 Setting Motor Constants
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
0.00 to
E2-02 Motor rated slip Hz 2.90 A A Q Q
20.00
D This setting is used as a reference value for the torque compensation function.
D The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity.
(The table shows the default settings for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.) (See page 8 - 47.)
D Calculate the rated slip (E2-02) from the value shown on the motor nameplate with the following equa-
tion and set this value.
7 Rated slip = rated frequency (Hz) rated speed (r/min) number of poles/120
J Motor No-load Current: E2-03
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D This setting is used as a reference value for the torque compensation function.
D The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity.
(The table shows the default settings for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.) (See page 8 - 47.)
D Set the no-load current (E2-03) at the rated voltage and rated frequency. Normally this value isnt
shown on the motor nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer.
J Motor Line-to-line Resistance: E2-05
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D This setting is used as a reference value for the torque compensation function.
D The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity.
(The table shows the default settings for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.) (See page 8 - 47.)
D Set the motors terminal resistance (UV, VW, and WU). Normally this value isnt shown on the
motor nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer.
7 - 14
7.2 V/f Control without PG
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The above table shows the settings for 200V
class, 0.4 kW Inverter. (See page:8 - 47)
D The motor ironcore loss is set in W units.
D Normally, the settings do not need to be altered. However, if the Inverter and motor capacities are vast-
ly different, set the E2-10 value for the same Inverter capacity as the applicable motor. (See page:
8 - 47)
7 - 15
Advanced Operation
Open-loop Vector
Group Function Comments
Flux Vector
V/f w/PG
V/f
b1 Sequence Settings such as the reference input method f f f f
b2 DC Injection Braking DC injection braking function settings f f f f
b3 Speed Search Speed search function settings f f f f
b4 Delay Timers Timer function settings f f f f
b Application b5 PID Control PID control settings f f f f
b6 Dwell Functions Hold Acceleration/deceleration time dwell function settings f f f f
b7 Droop Control L Droop Control function settings f
b8 Energy Saving Not used. (Cant be set.) f f
b9 Zero Servo L Zero-servo function settings f
C1 Accel/Decel Acceleration/deceleration time settings f f f f
C2 S-Curve Acc/Dec S-curve characteristics for accel/decel times f f f f
C3 Motor-Slip Compensation L Motor temperature compensation function adjustment f f f f
C4 Torque Compensation Not used. (Cant be set.) f f f
C Tuning
C5 Speed Controls Speed control loop adjustment f f
C6 Carrier Frequency Carrier frequency settings f f f f
C7 Hunting Prevention Not used. (Cant be set.) f f
C8 Factory Tuning Not used. (Cant be set.) f
d1 Preset Reference Frequency reference settings (when using Operator) f f f f
d2 Reference Limits Frequency upper and lower limit settings f f f f
d3 Jump Frequencies Prohibited frequency settings f f f f
d Reference
Reference frequency hold
d4 Up/Down, Accel/Decel stop hold frequency setting f f f f
function
d5 Torque Control L Torque control settings and adjustment f
E1 V/f Pattern Motor constant settings f f f f
7
L
E2 Motor Setup (Motor constants set automatically with autotuning.) f f f f
E Motor E3 Motor 2 Control Methods Control method settings for motor 2. f f f f
E4 Motor 2 V/f Characteristics V/f characteristics settings for motor 2. f f f f
E5 Motor 2 Motor Constants Motor constant settings for motor 2. f f f f
PG Speed Control Card
F1 Constant settings for a PG Speed Control Card f f
Settings
F2 Analog Reference Card AI User constant settings for an Analog Reference Card f f f f
F3 Digital Reference Card DI User constant settings for a Digital Reference Card f f f f
F4 Analog Monitor Card AO User constant settings for an Analog Monitor Card f f f f
F5 Digital Output Card DO User constant settings for a Digital Output Card f f f f
F Options
F6 Digital Output Card DO User constant settings for a Digital Output Card f f f f
F7 Pulse Monitor Card PO User constant settings for a Pulse Monitor Card f f f f
SI-F/SI-G Transmission
F8 User constant settings for a Transmission Card f f f f
Card
Transmission Cards other
F9 User constant settings for a Transmission Card f f f f
than SI-K2 and SI-F/G
H1 Multi-function Inputs Function selection for multi-function inputs f f f f
H2 Multi-function Outputs Function selection for multi-function outputs f f f f
H3 Analog Inputs Function selection for analog inputs f f f f
H Terminal
T i l Multi-function Analog Out-
H4 Function selection for analog outputs f f f f
puts
MEMOBUS Communica-
H5 MEMOBUS communications settings f f f f
tions
7 - 16
7.3 Flux Vector Control
Control Meth-
od
Open-loop Vector
Group Function Comments
Flux Vector
V/f w/PG
V/f
L1 Motor Overload Sets electrical/thermal functions that protect the motor. f f f f
L2 Power Loss Ridethru Selects the power-loss processing method. f f f f
L3 Stall Prevention Accel/Decel stall prevention settings and selection f f f f
L4 Reference Detection Frequency detection settings and selection f f f f
L Protection
L5 Fault Restart Fault restart function settings f f f f
L6 Torque Detection Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 (by current) f f f f
L7 Torque Limit L Torque limit function settings f f
L8 Hardware Protection Hardware overheating and open-phase protection settings f f f f
o1 Monitor Select Selects the Operators display and setting methods. f f f f
o Operator
o2 Key Selections Operators key function selection and other constants f f f f
7 - 17
Advanced Operation
7.3.1 Droop Control Function
The balance of the load is very different with different amounts of slip.
TA TA
Load torque Load torque
TB TB
Motor Bs torque
characteristics TA-TB>>0 TA-TB 0
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Set the amount of slip as the percentage of slip when the maximum output frequency is input and the
7 D
rated torque is generated.
Droop control is disabled if b7-01 is set to 0.0.
J Droop Control Delay Time: b7-02
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
7 - 18
7.3 Flux Vector Control
b7-01
Droop amount (Slip equivalent)
Torque
100%
Speed
0 Reference
speed
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
A time chart for the zero servo function is given in Figure 7.8.
OFF ON
Zero servo command
D Assign the zero servo command (setting 72) to one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-06).
D The zero-servo status is entered when the frequency (speed) reference falls below the zero-speed level
(b2-01).
D Be sure to leave the run command input ON. If the run command is turned OFF, the output will be inter-
rupted and the zero-servo function will become ineffective.
D Adjust the holding strength of the zero-servo with constant b9-01 (Zero Servo Gain). Increasing this
setting increases the holding strength, although oscillation will occur if the setting is too high. (Adjust
the holding strength after adjusting the speed control (ASR) gain.)
D To output the zero-servo status externally, assign the Zero Servo End signal (setting 33) to one of the
multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-03). The setting in b9-02 (Zero-servo Completion Width) is en-
abled when one of the multi-function outputs has been set to 33.
D The Zero Servo End signal remains ON as long as the position is within this range (starting position
Zero-servo Completion Width).
D Set the Zero-servo Completion Width to four times the number of pulses from the PG (pulse generator
or encoder), as shown in Figure 7.9.
7 - 19
Advanced Operation
7.3.2 Zero-servo Function
For example, when a 600 p/r encoder is being used, the number of pulses would be 2,400 p/r after multi-
plying by four.
D The Zero Servo End signal will go OFF when the zero servo command is turned OFF.
D Do not lock the servo for extended periods of time at 100% when using the zero servo function. Ex-
tended periods of servo lock can be achieved by ensuring that the current during the servolock is 50%
or less or by increasing the Inverter capacity.
1 pulse
Phase A
7 - 20
7.3 Flux Vector Control
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Speed control (controlled by C5-01 to C5-07)
1 Torque control
Torque reference +
Torque reference primary delay filter Internal torque
(d5-02) + reference
+
Torque limit
(L7-01 to L7-04)
Torque compensation
Speed feedback
Speed limit
bias (d5-05)
Multi-function ana-
H3-05 log input (terminal 0 to 1F 0 B B B B
16)
Multi-function ana-
H3-09 log input (terminal 1 to 1F 1F A A A A
14)
D Next, set the signal level for the analog input terminal that was set to torque reference.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
7 - 21
Advanced Operation
7.3.3 Torque Control
D Set the proper signal level for the torque reference that you want to input.
D The direction of the torque that is output is determined by the sign (polarity) of the signal that was input.
It is not determined by the direction of the run command (forward/reverse).
+Voltage (or current): Forward torque reference (generally counterclockwise; axis side)
Voltage: Reverse torque reference (generally clockwise; axis side)
Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction, only forward torque references can be
input when the 0 to +10 V or 4 to 20 mA signal level has been selected. If you want to input reverse
torque references, be sure to select the 0 to 10 V signal level.
D When supplying a voltage input to the frequency reference current input (terminal 14) (a setting of 0
or 1), be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1 on the control board. (See Figure 7.11.) If the jumper wire
isnt disconnected, the input resistor will be destroyed.
Jumper wire
J1
Control circuit
terminals
11 12(G) 13 14 15 16 17 25 26 27 33 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 9 10
R S T U V W/T3
1 2 B1 B2 T2
L3 T1
7 L1 L2
Braking Resistor
Main circuit
Power supply inputs Unit Motor output terminals
CHARGE
Fig 7.11 Jumper Wire Location for 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW
7 - 22
7.3 Flux Vector Control
D Settings
Setting Function
1 The speed limit is set from one of the analog frequency reference terminals (13 or 14).
2 The speed limit is set to the value in constant d5-04.
D
D
Set the signal level to match the speed limit voltage being input.
Limit with Constant Setting (d5-03 = 2)
7
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
120 to
d5-04 Speed limit % 0 A
+120
Set the speed limit as a percentage of the maximum frequency. (The max. frequency is 100%.) The
sign of the constant setting and the direction of the run command determine the direction in which
the speed is limited.
Setting +: Forward rotation; Speed is limited in the forward direction.
Reverse rotation; Speed is limited in the reverse direction.
Setting : Forward rotation; Speed is limited in the reverse direction.
Reverse rotation; Speed is limited in the forward direction.
The speed limit value is zero for rotation opposite to the speed limit direction.
For example, when a positive value is set in d5-04 and the forward rotation command is ON, the
effective range of the torque control is from zero to the speed limit value in the forward direction
(when constant d5-05, the speed limit bias, is set to 0).
7 - 23
Advanced Operation
7.3.3 Torque Control
D The speed limit bias can be used to add margins to the speed limit.
D When the speed limit bias is used, it is possible to set the same speed limit value in both the forward
and reverse directions.
D Set the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. (The max. frequency is
100%.)
For example, the following settings establish speed limits of 50% of the maximum output frequency
in both the forward and reverse directions.
Speed limit setting: Zero (with d5-04 as the speed limit: d5-03 = 2, d5-04 = 0)
Speed limit bias setting: 50% (d5-05 = 50)
D When a forward speed limit and a speed limit bias have been set, the speed range of the torque control
is from the speed limit bias setting to the speed limit setting + speed limit bias setting.
In effect, the speed limit range is extended by the speed limit bias in both the forward and reverse direc-
tions.
Motor speed
Forward
rotation
When the speed exceeds the forward
speed limit, the torque is increased in
the reverse direction.
Operation
The following operation will be performed if the torque reference is greater than 0 and the speed limit is
greater than 0 (winder operation).
D If (1 speed limit bias (d5-05)) < motor speed < (speed limit + d5-05), the torque will be controlled
according to the set torque reference.
D If the motor speed > (speed limit + d5-05), the speed limit circuit will output a negative torque reference
to prevent the motor speed from increasing.
D If the motor speed < (1 d5-05), the speed limit circuit will output a positive torque reference to pre-
vent the speed from increasing in the reverse direction.
Thus, if the torque reference is greater than 0 and the speed limit is greater than 0, the torque will be con-
trolled within the following limits:
(1 d5-05) < motor speed < (speed limit + d5-05)
7 - 24
7.3 Flux Vector Control
The relationships between the torque reference, speed limits, and motor speed are shown in the following
diagram.
Winding Operation Rewinding Operation
N T
T
N X
Line direction X Line direction
Configuration
M Motor M
Normal Rotation
Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
Direction
Torque Refer-
ence Polarity
(TREF)
Speed Limit Po-
larity (SLIM)
Torque Torque
Torque Torque Torque
Torque Torque
limit limit Torque
limit
TREF limit
TREF
NLIM NLIM
Generated Torque 0 Speed 0 Speed
0 NLIM Speed NLIM 0 Speed
d5-05 TREF
d5-05
Torque Torque
Torque limit limit Torque
limit limit
d5-05 d5-05
Torque reference
d5-02 0 to 1000 ms 0 A
delay time
D Set the torque reference filter primary delay time constant in ms units.
D Increase the time constant setting if oscillation occurs during torque control operation.
Setting the Torque Compensation: H3-05, -04, -08, -09
D Set multi-function analog input (terminal 16) or frequency reference current input (terminal 14) to
torque compensation (setting 14). When the amount of torque loss at the load is input to one of these
terminals, it is added to the torque reference to compensate for the loss.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Multi-function ana-
H3-05 log input (terminal 0 to 1F 0 B B B B
16)
Multi-function ana-
H3-09 log input (terminal 1 to 1F 1F A A A A
14)
7 - 25
Advanced Operation
7.3.3 Torque Control
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Settings
Setting Function
0 0 to +10 V input (When H3-08 is being set, be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1.)
1 0 to 10 V input (When H3-08 is being set, be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1.)
2 4 to 20 mA input (H3-08 only)
D Set the proper signal level for the torque compensation that you want to input.
D The direction of the torque compensation bias is determined by the sign (polarity) of the signal that
is input. It is not determined by the direction of the run command (forward/reverse).
+Voltage (or current): Forward torque compensation
(generally counter-clockwise; axis side)
Voltage: Reverse torque compensation (generally clockwise; axis side)
Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction, only forward torque compensation can
be input when the 0 to +10 V or 4 to 20 mA signal level has been selected. If you want to input
reverse torque compensation, be sure to select the 0 to 10 V signal level.
D When supplying a voltage input to the frequency reference current input (terminal 14), be sure to dis-
connect jumper wire J1 on the control board. If the jumper wire isnt disconnected, the input resistor
will be destroyed. Refer to Figure 7.11 for a diagram of the control board.
Adjusting the Gain/Bias of the Analog Inputs: H3-02, -03, -06, -07, -10, -11
D Adjust the gain and bias for the frequency reference (voltage), frequency reference (current), and mul-
ti-function analog inputs according to the input specifications for each input.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
0.0 to
H3-02 Gain (terminal 13) f % 100.0 B B B B
1000.0
7 H3-03 Bias (terminal 13) f
100.0 to
+100.0
% 0.0 B B B B
0.0 to
H3-06 Gain (terminal 16) f % 100.0 B B B B
1000.0
100.0 to
H3-07 Bias (terminal 16) f % 0.0 B B B B
+100.0
0.0 to
H3-10 Gain (terminal 14) f % 100.0 A A A A
1000.0
100.0 to
H3-11 Bias (terminal 14) f % 0.0 A A A A
+100.0
D Adjust the gain so that the maximum signal level corresponds to the maximum frequency or the mo-
tors rated torque, as follows.
When the input terminal is used for frequency reference:
A 10 V (20 mA) input indicates a frequency reference that is 100% of the max. output frequency.
When the input terminal is used for torque reference:
A 10 V (20 mA) input indicates a torque reference that is 100% of the motors rated torque.
When the input terminal is used for torque compensation:
A 10 V (20 mA) input indicates a torque compensation that is 100% of the motors rated torque.
D Adjust the bias so that the minimum signal level corresponds to the maximum frequency or the motors
rated torque, as follows.
When the input terminal is used for frequency reference:
A 0 V (4 mA) input indicates a frequency reference that is 100% of the max. output frequency.
When the input terminal is used for torque reference:
A 0 V (4 mA) input indicates a torque reference that is 100% of the motors rated torque.
When the input terminal is used for torque compensation:
A 0 V (4 mA) input indicates a torque compensation that is 100% of the motors rated torque.
7 - 26
7.3 Flux Vector Control
Reference value
Max. frequency Gain
100
Rated torque Gain
100
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Speed control (controlled by C5-01 to C5-07)
1 Torque control
D Set constant d5-01 to 0 (speed control) when using the speed/torque control switching function.
7 - 27
Advanced Operation
7.3.4 Speed/Torque Control Switching Function
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Speed/torque control
d5-06 0 to 1000 ms 0 A
switching timer
D This setting specifies the delay (0 to 1,000 ms) between a change in the multi-function input (ON
OFF or OFF ON) and the corresponding change in the control mode. The timer setting is effective
only when 71 (Speed/Torque Control Change) has been set in one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01
to H1-06).
D During the timer delay, the value of the 3 analog inputs will retain the values they had when the ON/
OFF status of speed/torque control switching signal was changed. Use this delay to make any prepara-
tions for the change in the control mode.
J Frequency Reference and Speed Limit
The frequency reference (during speed control) is set with b1-01 (Reference Selection).
The speed limit (during torque control) is set with d5-03 (Speed Limit Selection).
It is possible to assign the frequency reference and speed limit functions to the same analog input terminal
(13 or 14).
J Torque Reference and Torque Limit
If the torque reference has been assigned to a multi-function analog input or the frequency reference (cur-
rent) terminal, the input function changes when the control mode is switched between torque control and
speed control.
D During speed control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque limit input.
D During torque control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque reference input.
Either the absolute value of the torque limit input or the torque limit constant setting (L7-01 to L7-04),
whichever is smaller, will be used for the torque limit. Refer to 7.3.5 Torque Limit Function.
J Stopping Method
D When the run command is turned OFF during speed control, the motor is decelerated to a stop.
When the run command is turned OFF during torque control, the control mode is automatically
switched to speed control and the motor is decelerated to a stop.
D When A1-02 is set to 3 (flux vector control), the speed/torque change command can be set for a multi-
function input (a setting of 71) to switch between speed and torque control during operation. An exam-
7 ple is shown below.
7 - 28
7.3 Flux Vector Control
D Settings
User
Terminal No. Factory Setting Setting Function
Constant No.
8 H1-06 8 71 Speed/torque control change
b1-01 1 1 Frequency source (terminals 13, 14)
13
d5-03 1 1 Speed limit (terminals 13, 14)
16 H3-05 1 13 Torque reference/torque limit
CLOSED CLOSED
OPEN OPEN
Speed/torque change sig-
nal (terminal 8 input) Run
Run command Stop
1 2 1 2 3
7 - 29
Advanced Operation
7.3.5 Torque Limit Function
D Figure 7.15 shows the relationship between each constant and the output torque.
Output torque
Forward
direction L7-01
L7-04
Regenerative
torque Motor speed
Reverse Forward
Regenerative
torque
7 L7-03
L7-02
Reverse
direction
D When the torque limit function is used, the torque control has priority and motor speed control and
compensation will be disregarded, so the acceleration/deceleration times might be lengthened and mo-
tor speed might be reduced.
J Limiting Torque with Analog Inputs: H3-05, H3-09
The following two analog inputs that can be used to limit torque. Use either or both of these inputs as need-
ed with constants H3-05 and H3-09.
D Multi-function analog input terminal 16
D Frequency reference (current) terminal 14
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Multi-function ana-
H3-05 log input (terminal 0 to 1F 0 B B B B
16)
Multi-function ana-
H3-09 log input (terminal 1 to 1F 1F A A A A
14)
7 - 30
7.3 Flux Vector Control
D Settings
Setting Name
10 Forward Torque Limit
11 Reverse Torque Limit
12 Regenerative Torque Limit
13 Torque reference (The input limits torque in both the forward and reverse directions during
speed control.)
15 Forward/Reverse Torque Limit (Limits torque in both the forward and reverse directions.)
D The above table shows only those settings related to the torque limit function.
D Set the analog input terminals signal level, gain, and bias to match the actual input signal.
D The factory default settings for the input terminals signal level are as follows:
Terminal 16: 0 to +10 V (A 10 V input limits the torque to 100% of the motors rated torque.)
Terminal 14: 4 to 20 mA (A 20 mA input limits the torque to 100% of the motors rated torque.)
Figure 7.16 shows the relationship between the output torque and each torque limit.
Output torque
Forward
direction
Forward torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
Motor speed
Reverse Forward
D When the forward torque limit has been set, the analog input signal acts as the limit value for torque
generated in the forward direction. The torque limit input is effective when torque is generated in the
forward direction even if the motor is operating in reverse (regenerative torque).
D The torque limit is 100% of the motors rated torque when the analog input is at its maximum value
(10 V or 20 mA). To increase the torque limit above 100%, set the input terminals gain above 100%.
For example, a gain of 150.0% would result in a torque limit of 150% of the motors rated torque with
a 10 V or 20 mA analog input.
7.3.6 Setting/Adjusting Motor Constants 7
J Adjusting the V/f Pattern: E1-04 to E1-07, E1-13
D Normally it isnt necessary to adjust the V/f pattern with flux vector control. Adjust the V/f pattern
when you want to change the maximum output frequency, maximum voltage, base frequency, or mini-
mum output frequency settings.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
* 1. These voltages are for the 200 V class; Double the voltage for 400 V class Inverters.
* 2. If E1-13 is set to 0.0, the same value as in E1-13 will be set for E1-05. It does not normally
need to be set separately.
Note 1.The default setting for E1-09 depends on the control method. The default settings shown
in the table are for flux vector control.
2. The three frequency settings must satisfy the following equation:
E1-04 (FMAX) E1-06 (FA) > E1-09 (FMIN)
7 - 31
Advanced Operation
7.3.6 Setting/Adjusting Motor Constants
V BASE
(E1-13)
Frequency (Hz)
FMIN FA FMAX
(E1-09) (E1-06) (E1-04)
Frequency units of
o1-04 0, 1 0 B
constant setting
D The setting units for constants E1-04, E1-06, and E1-09 can be changed.
D The unit for other frequencies will not change.
D Constant o1-04 is specific to flux vector control.
J Setting Motor Constants: E2-01 to E2-09
The motor constants (function E2) will all be set automatically when autotuning is performed.
Set these constants manually if autotuning cant be completed properly.
D The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The default setting depends upon
the Inverter capacity. (The table shows the default setting for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.) See page
8 - 47.)
D Set the rated current (A) shown on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip: E2-02
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
0.00 to
E2-02 Motor rated slip Hz 2.90 A A Q Q
20.00
7 - 32
7.3 Flux Vector Control
Number of motor
E2-04 2 to 48 4 Q Q
poles
7 - 33
Advanced Operation
7.3.7 Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated
D Constants E2-07 and E2-08 are not required when using the motor at or below the rated frequency.
D Set these constants when operating at a frequency higher that the motors rated frequency. Set the fol-
lowing values:
Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 1: Iron-core saturation coefficient when magnetic flux is
50%.
Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 2: Iron-core saturation coefficient when magnetic flux is
75%.
D Normally these values arent shown on the motor nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the
motor manufacturer. Operation will be possible with the factory-preset values.
Motor Mechanical Loss: E2-09
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Motor mechanical
E2-09 0.0 to 10.0 % 0.0 A
loss
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
7 C3-01
Slip compensation
gain
f 0.0 to 2.5
Mul-
tiple
1.0 B B B
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
7 - 34
7.3 Flux Vector Control
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disables limited output voltage operation.
1 Enables limited output voltage operation.
D If the limited output voltage operation is disabled and output voltage becomes saturated, the output
current does not change. However, torque control precision is no longer possible.
Enable limited output voltage operation if precise torque control is required.
D If the limited output voltage operation is enabled, the magnetic flux current of the motor is automatical-
ly controlled, and the output voltage command itself is limited, which maintains precise torque control.
Check the Inverter current margins as the output current will be maximum 10% higher (with a rated
load) than when limited output voltage operation is disabled.
Note 1.C3-06 does not need to be changed if the Unit is used only at medium or low speeds, or
when the power supply voltage is 10% or more higher than the rated voltage for the motor,
or when torque control precision in the high-speed region is not required.
2. When the power supply voltage is too low for the rated motor voltage, precise torque con-
trol will not be maintained even if limited output voltage operation is enabled.
7 - 35
Advanced Operation
Open-loop Vector
Group Function Comments
Flux Vector
V/f w/PG
V/f
b1 Sequence Settings such as the reference input method f f f f
b2 DC Injection Braking DC injection braking function settings f f f f
b3 Speed Search Speed search function settings f f f f
b4 Delay Timers Timer function settings f f f f
b5 PID Control PID control settings f f f f
b Application
b6 Dwell Functions Acceleration/deceleration time dwell function settings f f f f
b7 Droop Control Not used. (Cant be set.) f
Multi-function input: Sets energy-saving control by energy saving
b8 Energy Saving L f f
reference.
b9 Zero Servo Not used. (Cant be set.) f
C1 Accel/Decel Acceleration/deceleration time settings f f f f
C2 S-Curve Acc/Dec S-curve characteristics for accel/decel times f f f f
C3 Motor-Slip Compensation Slip compensation function settings f f f f
C4 Torque Compensation Torque compensation function settings f f f
C Tuning
C5 Speed Controls Speed control adjustment f f
C6 Carrier Frequency Carrier frequency settings f f f f
C7 Hunting Prevention L Hunting prevention settings f f
C8 Factory Tuning Not used. (Cant be set.) f
d1 Preset Reference Frequency reference settings (when using Operator) f f f f
d2 Reference Limits Frequency upper and lower limit settings f f f f
d3 Prohibited Frequencies Prohibited frequency settings f f f f
d Reference
Reference frequency hold
d4 Up/Down, Accel/Decel stop hold frequency setting f f f f
function
d5 Torque Control Not used. (Cant be set.) f
7 E1
E2
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
L
Motor constant settings
(Motor constants are set manually.)
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
E Motor E3 Motor 2 Control Methods Control method settings for motor 2. f f f f
E4 Motor 2 V/f Characteristics V/f characteristics settings for motor 2. f f f f
E5 Motor 2 Motor Constants Motor constant settings for motor 2. f f f f
PG Speed Control Card
F1 Constant settings for a PG Speed Control Card f f
Settings
F2 Analog Reference Card AI User constant settings for an Analog Reference Card f f f f
F3 Digital Reference Card DI User constant settings for a Digital Reference Card f f f f
F4 Analog Monitor Card AO User constant settings for an Analog Monitor Card f f f f
F5 Digital Output Card DO User constant settings for a Digital Output Card f f f f
F Options
F6 Digital Output Card DO User constant settings for a Digital Output Card f f f f
F7 Pulse Monitor Card PO User constant settings for a Pulse Monitor Card f f f f
SI-F/SI-G Transmission
F8 User constant settings for a Transmission Card f f f f
Card
Transmission Card other
F9 User constant settings for a Transmission Card f f f f
than SI-K2, SI-F/G
H1 Multi-function Inputs Function selection for multi-function inputs f f f f
H2 Multi-function Outputs Function selection for multi-function outputs f f f f
H3 Analog Inputs Function selection for analog inputs f f f f
H Terminal
T i l Multi-function Analog Out-
H4 Function selection for analog outputs f f f f
puts
MEMOBUS Communica-
H5 MEMOBUS communications settings f f f f
tions
7 - 36
7.4 V/f Control with PG
Control Meth-
od
Open-loop Vector
Group Function Comments
Flux Vector
V/f w/PG
V/f
L1 Motor Overload Sets electrical/thermal functions that protect the motor. f f f f
L2 Power Loss Ridethru Selects the power-loss processing method. f f f f
L3 Stall Prevention Accel/Decel stall prevention settings and selection f f f f
L4 Reference Detection Frequency detection settings and selection f f f f
L Protection
L5 Fault Restart Fault restart function settings f f f f
L6 Torque Detection Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 f f f f
L7 Torque Limit Not used. (Cant be set.) f f
L8 Hardware Protection Hardware overheating and open-phase protection settings f f f f
o1 Monitor Select Selects the Operators display and setting methods. f f f f
o Operator
o2 Key Selections Operators key function selection and other constants f f f f
7 - 37
Advanced Operation
7.4.1 Energy-saving Control Function
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Constant b8-01 determines the Inverters output voltage when the energy-saving command is input.
Set this value as a percentage of the V/f patterns voltage.
D Constant L2-04 (the voltage recovery time) determines the rate at which the output voltage is changed
when the energy-saving command is turned ON or OFF.
J Energy-saving Frequency: b8-02
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Energy-saving fre-
b8-02 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 A A
quency
D Constant b8-02 determines the lower limit frequency for the energy-saving function.
D The energy-saving command is enabled only when the frequency reference is above the energy-saving
frequency and the motor speed is within the speed agree range.
A time chart for energy-saving operation is shown below.
OFF ON
Run command
OFF ON
Energy-saving
command
Frequency reference b8-02
7 (energy-saving frequency)
Output frequency
Output voltage
L2-04 E1-03 to E1-10 setting Energy-saving Gain
(Voltage recovery time) (b8-01)
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Hunting prevention
C7-01 0, 1 1 A A
selection
7 - 38
7.4 V/f Control with PG
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disables the hunting-prevention function.
1 Enables the hunting-prevention function.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Normally it isnt necessary to change these constants. Adjust these constants as follows if hunting oc-
curs with a light load.
Increase the setting in C7-02 if oscillation occurs when operating with a light load.
(If the setting is increased too much, the current can fall to the point where stalling occurs.)
Decrease the setting in C7-02 if stalling occurs.
Disable the hunting-prevention function (C7-01 = 0) if high responsiveness is more important than
suppressing oscillation.
7.4.3 Setting Motor Constants
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
0.00 to
E2-02 Motor rated slip Hz 2.90 A A Q Q
20.00
D These settings are used as reference values for the motor slip compensation function.
D The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity.
(The table shows the default settings for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.) (See page 8 - 47.)
D Calculate the rated slip (E2-02) from the value shown on the motor nameplate with the following equa-
tion and set this value.
Rated slip = rated frequency (Hz) rated speed (r/min) number of poles/120
7
J Motor No-load Current: E2-03
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D These settings are used as reference values for the motor slip compensation function.
D The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity.
(The table shows the default settings for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.) (See page 8 - 47.)
D Set the no-load current (E2-03) at the rated voltage and rated frequency. Normally this value isnt
shown on the motor nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer.
J Motor Line-to-line Resistance: E2-05
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D This setting is used as a reference value for the torque compensation function.
D The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity.
(The table shows the default settings for 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.) (See page 8 - 47.)
D Set the motors terminal resistance (UV, VW, and WU). Normally this value isnt shown on the
motor nameplate, so it might be necessary to contact the motor manufacturer.
7 - 39
Advanced Operation
7.4.3 Setting Motor Constants
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D The default setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The above table shows the settings for 200V
class, 0.4 kW Inverter. (See page 8 - 47)
D The motor iron-core loss is set in W units.
D Normally, the settings do not need to be altered. However, if the Inverter and motor capacities are vast-
ly different, set the E2-10 value for the same Inverter capacity as the applicable motor. (See page
8 - 47)
7 - 40
7.5 Common Functions
Open-loop Vector
Group Function Comments
Flux Vector
V/f w/PG
V/f
b1 Sequence Settings such as the reference input method f f f f
b2 DC Injection Braking L DC injection braking function settings f f f f
b3 Speed Search L Speed search function settings f f f f
b4 Delay Timers L Timer function settings f f f f
b5 PID Control L PID control settings f f f f
b Application
b6 Dwell Functions L Acceleration/deceleration time dwell function settings f f f f
b7 Droop Control Droop control settings f
Multi-function input: Sets energy-saving control by energy saving
b8 Energy Saving f f
reference.
b9 Zero Servo Zero servo settings f
C1 Accel/Decel Acceleration/deceleration time settings f f f f
C2 S-Curve Acc/Dec L S-curve characteristics for acceleration/deceleration times f f f f
C3 Motor-Slip Compensation L Slip compensation function settings f f f f
C4 Torque Compensation L Torque compensation function settings f f f
C Tuning
C5 Speed Controls Speed control tuning f f
C6 Carrier Frequency L Carrier frequency settings f f f f
C7 Hunting Prevention Hunting prevention settings f f
C8 Factory Tuning Adjustment for open-loop vector control f
d1 Preset Reference Frequency reference settings (when using Operator) f f f f
d2 Reference Limits L Frequency upper and lower limit settings f f f f
d3 Prohibited Frequencies L Prohibited frequency settings f f f f
d Reference
Reference Frequence Hold
d4 L Up/Down, Accel/Decel stop hold frequency setting f f f f
Functions
d5 Torque Control Torque control settings and tuning f
E1
E2
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
Motor constant settings
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f 7
E Motor E3 Motor 2 Control Methods Control method settings for motor 2. f f f f
E4 Motor 2 V/f Characteristics V/f characteristics settings for motor 2. f f f f
E5 Motor 2 Motor Constants Motor constant setting for motor 2. f f f f
PG Speed Control Card
F1 Constant settings for a PG Speed Control Card f f
Settings
F2 Analog Reference Card AI L User constant settings for an Analog Reference Card f f f f
F3 Digital Reference Card DI L User constant settings for a Digital Reference Card f f f f
F4 Analog Monitor Card AO L User constant settings for an Analog Monitor Card f f f f
F5 Digital Output Card DO User constant settings for a Digital Output Card f f f f
F Options
F6 Digital Output Card DO User constant settings for a Digital Output Card f f f f
F7 Pulse Monitor Card PO L User constant settings for a Pulse Monitor Card f f f f
SI-F/SI-G Transmission
F8 User constant settings for a Transmission Card f f f f
Card
Transmission Cards other
F9 User constant settings for a Transmission Card f f f f
than SI-K2 and SI-F/G
H1 Multi-function Inputs L Function selection for multi-function inputs f f f f
H2 Multi-function Outputs L Function selection for multi-function outputs f f f f
H3 Analog Inputs L Function selection for analog inputs f f f f
H Terminal
T i l Multi-function Analog Out-
H4 L Function selection for analog outputs f f f f
puts
MEMOBUS Communica-
H5 MEMOBUS communications settings
tions
7 - 41
Advanced Operation
Control Meth-
od
Open-loop Vector
Group Function Comments
Flux Vector
V/f w/PG
V/f
L1 Motor Overload L Sets electrical/thermal functions that protect the motor. f f f f
L2 Power Loss Ridethru L Selects the power-loss processing method. f f f f
L3 Stall Prevention L Accel/Decel stall prevention settings and selection f f f f
L4 Reference Detection L Frequency detection settings and selection f f f f
L Protection
L5 Fault Restart L Fault restart function settings f f f f
L6 Torque Detection L Sets overtorque detection functions 1 and 2 f f f f
L7 Torque Limit Torque limit settings f f
L8 Hardware Protection L Hardware overheating and open-phase protection settings f f f f
o1 Monitor Select L Selects the Operator display and setting methods. f f f f
o Operator
o2 Key Selections L Operator key function selection and other constants f f f f
7 - 42
7.5 Common Functions
D For the zero speed level (b2-01), set the frequency for beginning DC injection braking for deceleration.
If the excitation level is lower than the minimum output frequency (E1-09), the DC injection braking
will begin from the minimum output frequency.
D In flux vector control mode, DC injection braking becomes the initial excitation starting frequency at
the time of deceleration. In that case, braking starts from the excitation level regardless of the minimum
output frequency setting.
D The excitation level is also used as the operating frequency for the zero servo function (for flux vector
control only).
D For the DC injection braking current (b2-02), set the value for the current that is output at the time of
DC injection braking. DC injection braking current is set as a percentage of Inverter rated output cur-
rent, with the Inverter rated output current taken as 100%. 7
D For the DC injection braking time at start (b2-03), set the DC injection braking operating time for when
the motor is started.
D For the DC injection braking time at stop (b2-04), set the DC injection braking operating time for when
the motor is stopped.
D When the DC injection command (initial excitation command) for multi-function input terminals is
used at the same time, open the terminal input, and perform DC injection braking only for the period
of time set under b2-03.
D Figure 7.19 provides a timing chart of DC injection braking (initial excitation).
Output frequency
The larger of
b2-01 or
E1-09 E1-09
(Min. output frequency)
Time
b2-03 b2-04
(DC injection braking time at start) (DC injection braking
time at stop)
7 - 43
Advanced Operation
7.5.1 Application Constants: b
When b2-08 is 100%, it indicates the motor no-load current (notor magnetic flux current).
Run command
Output frequency
Limited to smaller of 80% of the Inverters rated
b2-08 current or the motors rated current.
b2-08=100% Motors magnetic flux
Motors magnetic flux current current during control
b2-03
Control mode During base block During speed control
D If b2-08 is set at 100% or greater, a stronger current can be supplied when starting DC injection braking
time at start (initial excitation), and the motors internal magnetic flux startup can be speeded up. The
startup time can be reduced by approximately half when the b2-08 is set to 200%.
D The magnetic flux startup is slower if b2-08 is less than 100%. (Do not normally set b2-08 to less than
7 100%. However, the operation will be the same as b2-08=100% when b2-08=0%, and the startup will
be at the set DC injection braking current (b2-02).
D If the magnetic flux compensation volume (b2-08) is set to a large value, there may be greater noise
generated from the motor during DC injection braking time at start.
D The electrical time constant when the motors magnetic flux is started (secondary circuit time constant)
can be calculated using the motor constant E2 setting and the following formula:
Secondary circuit time constant T2 = [(E2-012-E2-032)1/2 /(2 x E2-02 x E2-03)] (sec)
D Do not use this function when slow commencement of braking due to DC injection braking time at
start (initial excitation) is becoming a problem. Use the separate DC braking command (setting: 60)
for multi-function contact input , and start the motor magnetic flux beforehand while stopping the mo-
tor.
J Speed Search: b3-01 to b3-03
The speed search function finds the speed of a coasting motor and starts up smoothly from that speed. It
is effective in situations such as switching from a commercial power supply.
* When the control method is switched, the factory setting changes as follows:
V/f control: 0; V/f with PG: 1; open-loop vector 0; flux vector: 1
7 - 44
7.5 Common Functions
D Settings
Setting Contents
0 Speed search disabled: Motor starts from minimum output frequency.
Speed search enabled: Speed search is performed from maximum output frequency and
1* motor is started. (In control methods with PG, i.e., V/f with PG feed-
back and flux vector, motor starts from the motor speed.)
Care must be taken as the motor accelerates rapidly under a light load in open-loop vector control mode.
D Set 1 to use the speed search function. A speed search is performed each time the run command is
input.
D To use speed search freely in control methods without PG, i.e., V/f control and open-loop vector con-
trol, set the multi-function contact input selection (H1-01 to H1-06) to 61 or 62 (external search com-
mand). (See para 7.5.5.)
Speed Search Operating Current, Speed Search Deceleration Time, and Min. Baseblock Time:
b3-02, b3-03, L2-03
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
OFF ON
Run command
Deceleration time set for b3-03
Maximum output Frequency
frequency reference
that is set
Output frequency
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)
b3-02
Output current
7 - 45
Advanced Operation
7.5.1 Application Constants: b
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set for b4-01 (timer function ON-delay
time), the timer function output turns ON.
D When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set for b4-02 (timer function OFF-
delay time), the timer function output turns OFF. An operation example of the timer function is shown
in Figure 7.22.
ON ON
Timer function
input
ON ON
Timer function
output
7 - 46
7.5 Common Functions
Deviation
Time
PID control
Control input
I control
D control
P control
Time
D P Control: A control input proportional to the deviation is output. The deviation cannot be zeroed
by P control alone.
D I Control: A control input which is an integral of the deviation is output. This is effective for
matching the feedback to the target value. Sudden changes, however, cannot be fol-
lowed.
D D Control: A control input which is an integral of the deviation is output. Quick response to sud-
den changes is possible.
D PID Control: Optimum control is achieved by combining the best features of P, I, and D control.
D Basic PID Control: This is the basic form of PID control. When the D control response is adjusted
to follow changes in the control object, overshooting and undershooting can oc-
cur with changes in the target value.
+ +
Target value P Control object
+ +
I
Feedback value
7 - 47
7
Advanced Operation
7.5.1 Application Constants: b
Fig 7.24
OFF when B5=0, at
JOG mode, ow when
multi-function input
(19) is set to OFF.
Frequency
Frequency reference from Option reference
Card (transmission, AI, DI), terminal
13, Operator, or multi-step speed
reference
Multi-function
analog input setting
No B5 - 01 B5 - 11 109%
Target Terminal 14 or 16 Yes
Inverters PID Control Function
7 - 48
No. bit 1
U1 - 38 U1 - 36 B5 - 02 B5 - 06 B5 - 08 B5 - 09 U1 - 37
B5 - 10
MEMOBUS communications
(Register No.: 06) Proportional Primary Gain
gain delay filter
B5 - 03 B5 - 04
Integral
B5 - 07
B5 - 05 B5 - 01
Differ-
ential
U1 - 24
Differ-
ential
B5 - 01
7.5 Common Functions
D Settings
Setting Contents
0 PID control disabled
1 PID control enabled, deviation signal is subject to derivative control.
2 PID control enabled, feedback signal is subject to derivative control.
3 PID control enabled (frequency command + PID control, deviation is subject to D control.)
4 PID control enabled (frequency command + PID control, feedback is subject to D control.)
To enable PID control, make a setting between 1 to 4. (Normally 2 or 4 is used, for mea-
sured-value derivative PID control).
When PID control is enabled, the target value input is determined as shown in the following table.
Input Condition
Frequency reference currently Determined by b1-01.
selected
Multi-function analog input Set the PID target value (set value: 0C) in H3-05 or H3-09.
terminal
MEMOBUS transmission Set the bit 1 (enabled/disabled selection for transmitted PID target value) of
MEMOBUS register No. 0F to 1 (enabled) and set in the register No. 6.
If setting the target value input as b1-01=0 (Digital Operator), set the o1-03 to 1 (% unit) and
input a percentage value for the target value. (When the speed reference is changed, 100% becomes
the maximum frequency reference.)
The feedback value is input from a multi-function analog input terminal or frequency reference
(current) terminal. Set PID feedback (setting: B) for either the constant H3-05 (multi-function ana-
log input, terminal 16), or constant H3-09 (multi-function analog input, terminal 14) function
selection. (See Table 7.11.) Adjust the amount of feedback by setting the gain and bias of the analog
inputs that are used.
Figure 7.25 shows a speed control application example for settings 3 and 4 (for SPEC: F).
+ 7
Speed reference (constant) Frequency reference
+
+
Speed detection value PID
(Tachometer generator,
etc.)
Fig 7.25 Application Example of Settings 3 and 4
D Proportional gain (P), Integral (I) Time, and Differential (D) Time: b5-02, b5-03, b5-05
Adjust the responsiveness of the PID control by means of the proportional gain (P), integral time
(I), and derivative time (D).
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
0.00 to Mul-
b5-02 Proportional gain (P) f 1.00 A A A A
25.00 tiple
b5-03 Integral (I) time f 0.0 to 360.0 s 1.0 A A A A
0.00 to
b5-05 Derivative (D) time f s 0.00 A A A A
10.00
Optimize the responsiveness by adjusting it while operating an actual load (mechanical system).
(Refer to Adjusting PID Control on page 7 - 51.) Any control (P, I, or D) that is set to zero (0.0,
0.00) will not operate.
7 - 49
Advanced Operation
7.5.1 Application Constants: b
This constant prevents the calculated value of the integral control in the PID control from exceed-
ing the fixed amount.
There is normally no need to change the setting.
Reduce the setting if there is a risk of load damage, or of the motor going out of step, by the Invert-
ers response when the load suddenly changes. If the setting is reduced too much, the target value
and the feedback value will not match.
Set this constant as a percentage of the maximum output frequency, with the maximum frequency
taken as 100%.
D PID Limit: b5-06
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Constant b5-06 prevents the frequency reference after PID control from exceeding the fixed
amount.
Set this constant as a percentage of the maximum output frequency, with the maximum frequency
taken as 100%.
D PID Offset Adjustment: b5-07
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Constant b5-08 is the low-pass filter setting for PID control outputs.
There is normally no need to change the setting.
If the viscous friction of the mechanical system is high, or if the rigidity is low, causing the mechan-
ical system to oscillate, increase the setting so that it is higher than the oscillation frequency period.
This will decrease the responsiveness, but it will prevent the oscillation.
J PID Output Characteristics: b5-09 (for SPEC: F)
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Settings
Setting Function
0 PID output has forward characteristics
1 PID output has reverse characteristics
7 - 50
7.5 Common Functions
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Mul
b5-10 PID output gain 0.0 to 25.0 1.0 A A A A
tiple
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Executes 0 limit if PID output is negative (does not reverse).
1 Reverse rotation if PID output is negative.
After adjustment
Time
Before adjustment
Time
7 - 51
Advanced Operation
7.5.2 Tuning Constants: C
After adjustment
Time
After adjustment
Time
Dwell frequency at
b6-01 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 A A A A
start
b6-02 Dwell time at start 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.0 A A A A
Dwell frequency at
7 b6-03
stop
0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 A A A A
Output
frequency
b6-01
b6-03
Time
b6-02 b6-04
7 - 52
7.5 Common Functions
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
S-curve characteris-
C2-01 tic time at accelera- 0.00 to 2.50 s 0.20 A A A A
tion start
S-curve characteris-
C2-02 tic time at accelera- 0.00 to 2.50 s 0.20 A A A A
tion end
S-curve characteris-
C2-03 tic time at decelera- 0.00 to 2.50 s 0.20 A A A A
tion start
S-curve characteris-
C2-04 tic time at decelera- 0.00 to 2.50 s 0.00 A A A A
tion end
C2-01 C2-04
Time
D When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the acceleration and deceleration times will be lengthened
as follows:
Acceleration time =
Selected acceleration time + (S-curve at beginning of acceleration + S-curve at end of acceleration)
/2
Deceleration time =
Selected deceleration time + (S-curve at beginning of deceleration + S-curve at end of decelera-
tion) / 2
7
J Motor Slip Compensation: C3-01 to C3-04
D The motor slip compensation function calculates the motor torque according to the output current, and
sets gain to compensate for output frequency.
This function is used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a load. It is mainly effective
with V/f control (without PG).
* When the control method is switched, the factory setting changes as follows:
V/f control: 0.0; V/f with PG: 1.0; open-loop vector 0; flux vector: 1.0
When 1.0 is set, this function compensates for the rated slip that has been set, by the rated torque
output.
With flux vector control, this becomes the gain to compensate for slip caused by motor temperature
variation. (Refer to Slip Compensation Gain: C3-01 under 7.3.6.)
7 - 53
Advanced Operation
7.5.2 Tuning Constants: C
Slip compensation
C3-02 0 to 10000 ms 200 * A A
primary delay time
Slip compensation
C3-03 0 to 250 % 200 A A
limit
7 D Constant C3-03 sets the slip compensation limit as a percentage of motor rated slip (E2-02), with the
motor rated slip taken as 100%.
D If the speed is lower than the target value and does not change even when the slip compensation gain
is adjusted, it is possible that the slip compensation limit has been reached. Raise the limit and then
check again. Make sure, however, that the value of the sum of the reference frequency and the slip com-
pensation limit does not exceed the speed capacity of the machinery.
D The limit is as shown in Figure 7.28 in the constant torque and constant output areas.
Slip compensation limit
E1-04 C3-03
E1-06
C3-03
Output frequency
E1-06 E1-04
Slip compensation
C3-04 selection during re- 0, 1 0 A A A
generation
7 - 54
7.5 Common Functions
D Settings
Setting Contents
0 Slip compensation disabled during regeneration
1 Slip compensation enabled during regeneration
D This constant can be changed during operation, but normally no adjustments are required. Make ad-
justments in the following cases under the V/f control mode:
If the wiring distance between the Inverter and the motor is long, raise the setting.
If the motor capacity is less than the Inverter capacity (the maximum application motor capacity),
raise the setting.
If the motor generates excessive oscillation, lower the setting.
D Set the torque compensation gain so that the output current at low-speed rotation does not exceed 50%
of the Inverters rated output current.
D Do not adjust the setting of this constant for open-loop vector control.
Torque Compensation Time Constant: C4-02
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Torque compensa-
C4-02 0 to 10000 ms 20 * A A A
tion time constant
7
* When the control method is switched, the factory setting changes as follows:
V/f control, V/f with PG : 200 [1000 ms for inverters of 30 kW or larger (200 V class), or
inverters of 55 kW or larger (400 V class)]; open-loop vector : 20
D The torque compensation time constant does not normally need to be adjusted, but make adjustments
in the following cases:
If the motor generates excessive oscillation, raise the setting.
If motor responsiveness is low, lower the setting.
7 - 55
Advanced Operation
7.5.2 Tuning Constants: C
If there are great irregularities in speed or torque, lower the carrier frequency.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Carrier frequency
C6-01 2.0 to 15.0*1 kHz 15.0 *2 B B B B
upper limit
Carrier frequency
C6-02 0.4 to 15.0 kHz 15.0 *2 A A
lower limit
Carrier frequency Mul-
C6-03 00 to 99 00 A A
proportional gain tiple
* 1. The setting range for the carrier frequency upper limit is as follows for the control methods:
S V/f control (with or without PG): 0.4 to 15.0
S Vector control (open-loop or flux): 2.0 to 15.0
* 2. The setting range and the factory setting vary according to the Inverter capacity. The table
shows a value of 200 V class, 0.4 kW. (See page 8 - 47.)
D In the vector control modes, the carrier frequency is determined by the carrier frequency upper limit
(constant C6-01). In the V/f control modes (both with and without PG), the carrier frequency can be
changed in response to the output frequency by setting the carrier frequency lower limit (constant
C6-02) and the carrier frequency proportional gain (constant C6-03).
Carrier frequency The coefficient K varies depending
on the carrier frequency upper limit, as
described below:
C6-01
D C6-01 10.0kHz : K = 3
D 10.0kHz > C6-01 5.0kHz : K = 2
7 D 5.0kHz > C6-01 : K = 1
C6-02
Output frequency
x (C6-03) x K
Output frequency
0 E1-04
(Maximum output frequency)
D To make the carrier frequency constant, either set the same value for constants C6-01 and C6-02 or
set the carrier frequency proportional gain (constant C6-03) to 0 (i.e., fix at upper limit value). The
following settings will generate a constant setting fault (OPE11):
Carrier frequency upper limit (C6-01) > 5.0 kHz and carrier frequency lower limit (C6-02) 5.0 kHz
Carrier frequency proportional gain (C6-03) > 6 and (C6-01) < C6-02)
D If the lower limit is set higher than the upper limit, the lower limit will be disregarded and carrier frequency will
be fixed at the upper limit.
7 - 56
7.5 Common Functions
Frequency reference
d2-01 0.0 to 110.0 % 100.0 B B B B
upper limit
Frequency reference
d2-02 0.0 to 109.0 % 0.0 B B B B
lower limit
D The frequency reference upper and lower limits are set as a percentage of the maximum output fre-
quency (E1-04), in increments of 1%.
D The upper and lower limits of the frequency reference are shown in Figure 7.30.
Internal frequency reference
Frequency reference
upper limit (d2-01)
Frequency reference
lower limit (d2-02) Set frequency reference
D To disable this function, set the jump frequency references (d3-01 to d3-03) to 0.0 Hz.
D For d3-01 to d3-03, set the center values of the frequencies to be jumped. Be sure to set the jump fre-
quency so that d3-03 d3-02 d3-01.
D For d3-04, set the jump frequency bandwidth. The jump frequency the jump frequency bandwidth
becomes the jump frequency range.
D Operation is prohibited within the jump frequency range, but changes during acceleration and decel-
eration are smooth with no jumps.
D The relation between the internal frequency reference and the set frequency references is shown in Fig-
ure 7.31.
7 - 57
Advanced Operation
7.5.3 Reference Constants: d
d3-04
D When hold status is established by these external signals, specify whether or not the output frequency
is to be retained.
D When this function is enabled, operation is re-started after power-up using the frequency reference val-
ue that was retained.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Frequency reference
d4-01 hold function selec- 0, 1 0 A A A A
tion
D Settings
Setting Description
7 0 Disabled. Restart after operation stoppage or power-up begins at zero.
1 Enabled. Restart after operation stoppage or power-up begins at the held frequency reference.
D For information regarding the acceleration/deceleration stop (hold) command and the up/down com-
mand, refer to the description of Multi-function Inputs (H1).
J Trim Control Level: d4-02
D The trim control level is valid when the trim control increase command (setting: 1C) or trim control
decrease command (setting: 1D) is set for a multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-06).
D If the trim control increase command is ON when a frequency reference is input on the analog input,
the trim control level will be added to the analog frequency reference and then output as the output
frequency. If the trim control decrease command is ON, the frequency reference will be decreased by
the trim control level.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Set the trim control level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
D If the frequency reference minus the trim control level is less than zero, the output frequency will be
zero.
D Refer to the description of Multi-function Inputs (H1) for details on the trim control increase and trim
control decrease commands.
7 - 58
7.5 Common Functions
Installation Procedure
1. Turn OFF the Inverters main-circuit power supply. Wait at least one minute (or at least three minutes
for models of 30 kW or more).
2. Remove the Inverters front cover. Check to be sure that the CHARGE LED is turned OFF.
3. Check the Option Cards installation location (A, C, or D). (See Figure 7.32.)
4. Insert the accessory spacer into the spacer mounting hole in the Inverter mounting base.
5. Align the Option Card connector with the connector position on the control board, and then pass the
spacer to the spacer mounting hole on the card.
Press firmly until the spacer snaps into place.
6. Connect the Option Cards FG connection line to the Inverter ground terminal (terminal 12).
Option A
Inverter
mounting base
7
4CN
Option A con- 7CN
nector
Option C
2CN
Option C con-
nector
Control board
3CN Option D
Option D con-
nector
7 - 59
Advanced Operation
7.5.4 Option Constants: F
Bi-polar or uni-polar
F2-01 0, 1 0 B B B B
input selection
D Settings
Setting Description
0 3-channel individual input (CH1: terminal 13; CH2: terminal 14; CH3: (b1-01 = 1)
terminal 16)
1 3-channel additional input (Sum of CH1 to CH3 is used as the frequen- (b1-01 = 3)
cy reference value.)
D Constant b1-01 (reference selection) must be set to 1 (external terminal), when 3-channel individual
input (setting: 0) is set.
D When using a AI-14B and setting 3-channel individual input, the multi-function inputs cannot be set
to the Option/Inverter selection function (setting: 2).
J Digital Reference Card: F3-01
D When using a DI-08 or DI-16H2 Digital Reference Card, set constant b1-01 (reference selection) to
3 (option) and set the input method with constant F3-01.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Settings
Setting Description
0 BCD 1% unit
1 BCD 0.1% unit
7 2 BCD 0.01% unit
3 BCD 1 Hz unit
4 BCD 0.1 Hz unit
5 BCD 0.01 Hz unit
6 BCD special setting (5-digit input) (Only when DI-16H2 is used.)
7 Binary input (Setting is displayed in decimal notation.)
D The maximum frequency (100% speed) reference will be used when the binary input is set (setting:
7) and all bits are 1.
DI-08: Maximum output frequency reference (255/100%).
DI-16H2: Maximum output frequency reference (16 bits: 30000/100%, 12 bits: 4095/100%).
D Setting 6, BCD special setting (5-digit input), is valid only when the D1-16H2 is used. Using this set-
ting, a frequency from 0.00 to 399.98 Hz can be set in BCD. The data input method is different from
that for settings of 1 to 5.
Setting: 1 to 5 Sign 8 103 4 103 2 103 1 103 8 100 4 100 2 100 1 100
Setting: 6 2 104 1 104 8 103 4 103 2 103 1 101 8 100 4 100 2 100
D The sign bit is used as a data bit, so only positive (plus) data can be set.
D The second digit below the decimal point is set by bits 8x100, 4x100, and 2x100, so the settings are
made in units of 0.02 Hz. (If these three bits are 111, 110, and 101, they will be recognized as
9.)
D If 2 or higher is set for o1-03, the input will become BCD, and the units will change to the o1-03
setting.
7 - 60
7.5 Common Functions
Channel 1 monitor
F4-01 1 to 38 2 B B B B
selection
Mul-
F4-02 Channel 1 gain f 0.00 to 2.50 1.00 B B B B
tiple
Channel 2 monitor
F4-03 1 to 38 3 B B B B
selection
Mul-
F4-04 Channel 2 gain f 0.00 to 2.50 0.50 B B B B
tiple
Channel 1 output f 10.0 to
F4-05 % 0.0 B B B B
bias +10.0
F4-02 +
AO
(F4-04) +
Output gain
F4-05
(F4-06)
Output bias
Fig 7.33 Analog Output Block Diagram
D For the output monitor selections (F4-01, F4-03), set the numbers for the right side of the U1
constants in the Table 4.3. The setting range is 1 to 38, but the following numbers cannot be set: 4, 10,
11, 12, 13, 14, 25, and 28 to 35.
D When the AO-12 is used, outputs of 0 to 10 V are possible. For that, set constant H4-07 (multi-func-
tion analog output signal level selection) to 1 (0 to 10 V outputs). There are some monitor items.
However, that can only use outputs of 0 to +10 V even if constant H4-07 is set to 1.
D When the AO-08 is used, only outputs of 0 to +10 V are possible regardless of the constant H4-07 set-
ting.
7
J DO-02 Digital Output Card Settings: F5-01, F5-02
D Set the output selections in the following constants when using a DO-02 Digital Output Card.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Channel 1 output
F5-01 00 to 37 0 B B B B
selection
Channel 2 output
F5-02 00 to 37 1 B B B B
selection
7 - 61
Advanced Operation
7.5.4 Option Constants: F
D The items output from the DO-08 will be as follows according to the setting of F6-01.
Setting Terminal Output
TD5-TD11 Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF)
TD6-TD11 Overvoltage (OV)
TD7-TD11 Inverter overload (OL2)
0: 8 channels of TD8-TD11 Fuse blown (PUF)
individual out-
out
puts TD9-TD11 Overspeed (OS)
TD10-TD11 Inverter overheat (OH1) or motor overload (OL1)
TD1-TD2 Zero speed detection
TD3-TD4 Speed agree
TD5-TD11 Bit 0
TD6-TD11 Bit 1
Binary code (see below)
TD7-TD11 Bit 2
Coded Outputs
Bit 3210 Meaning Bit 3210 Meaning
0000 No fault 1000 External fault (EF)
7 0001 Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF) 1001 Controller fault (CPF)
0010 Overvoltage (OV) 1010 Motor overload (OL1)
0011 Inverter overload (OL2) 1011 Not used
0100 Inverter overheat (OH, OH1) 1100 Power loss (UV1, UV2, UV3)
0101 Overspeed (OS) 1101 Excessive speed deviation (DEV)
0110 Fuse blown (PUF) 1110 PG disconnected (PGO)
Braking Resistor Unit overheat
0111 (RH) 1111 Not used.
Braking Transistor fault (RR)
7 - 62
7.5 Common Functions
Frequency multiple
F7-01 0 to 4 1 B B B B
selection
D Settings
Setting Description
0 1F 1 x Inverter output frequency
1 6F 6 x Inverter output frequency
2 10F 10 x Inverter output frequency
3 12F 12 x Inverter output frequency
4 36F 36 x Inverter output frequency
D F indicates the output frequency (Hz). For example, if 0 (1F) is set, when the output frequency
is 60 Hz there will be an output of 60 pulses per second. (Duty 50%)
7 - 63
7.5.5 External Terminal Functions: H
7 - 64
Control Method
Setting V/f
value Function Open
Flux
V/f w/ loop
Vector vector
PG
61 External speed search command 1: Maximum output frequency (ON: speed search) f f
62 External speed search command 2: Set frequency (ON: speed search) f f
63 Energy-saving command (ON: Energy-saving control set for b8-01, b8-02) f f
64 External speed search command 3 f f f f
65 KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact) f f f f
66 KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact) f f f f
71 Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control) f
72 Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo) f
77 Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (ON: C5-03) f
Constant Settings
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Multi-function input
H1-01 0 to 77 24 B B B B
1 (terminal 3)
Multi-function input
H1-02 0 to 77 14 B B B B
2 (terminal 4)
Multi-function input
H1-03 0 to 77 3 (0) B B B B
3 (terminal 5)
Multi-function input
H1-04 0 to 77 4 (3) B B B B
4 (terminal 6)
Multi-function input
H1-05 0 to 77 6 (4) B B B B
5 (terminal 7)
Multi-function input
H1-06 0 to 77 8 (6) B B B B
5 (terminal 8)
D The factory settings in parentheses are for when the Unit is initialized for 3-wire control.
D The following table shows the settings and section references for some common functions.
Function Setting Section
7
3-wire sequence (forward/reverse run command) 0 6.1.8
Multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and jog fre- 3 to 6 6.1.8
quency reference
Accel/Decel time 1 and 2 7, 1A 6.1.8
Emergency stop 15 6.1.8
FJOG/RJOG commands 12, 13 6.1.8
Terminal 13/14 switch 1F 6.1.8
Timer function input 18 7.5.1
Energy-saving command 63 7.2.1, 7.4.1
D With this setting, the multi-function input selects the input method for the frequency reference and run
command.
D The input method can be switched only when the Inverter is stopped.
D The Digital Operator LOCAL/REMOTE Key is disabled when this function has been set in a multi-
function input.
7 - 65
7.5.5 External Terminal Functions: H
D With this setting, the multi-function input enables the frequency reference input from the Inverter itself
or the one from Option Card. The frequency reference input can be switched only when the Inverter
is stopped.
D Be sure that b1-01 (the frequency reference source selector) has been set to 0 (Operator) or 1 (external
terminal). Only the frequency reference from the Option Card will be enabled if b1-01 is set to 3 (Op-
tion PCB).
D Setting 2 cant be selected if the AI-14B is being used and constant F2-01 (AI-14 Input Selector) is
set to 0.
D Only frequency reference can be switched when the Option Card not corresponding to run command
(e.g. AI14B, DI16H) is used.
External Baseblock NO (Setting: 8)
OFF Normal operation
ON Baseblock
D With either of these settings, the multi-function input controls baseblock operation.
D Baseblock is an interruption of the Inverter output. The motor coasts while the baseblock command
is being input.
D The output frequency is retained internally, so the same frequency will be output again when the base-
block command is cleared. The output frequency will change in a step pattern when the output re-
sumes, so take some safety precaution such as turning OFF the run command especially if the base-
block command was input when the motor was operating at high speed. (When the run command is
turned OFF, the internally retained output frequency is reset to zero.)
D After a baseblock command is cleared, the voltage will be restored in the voltage recovery time set in
L2-04.
OFF ON
Run/stop command
7 Baseblock command
Input Cleared
Frequency reference
Coasting
D With this setting, the multi-function input pauses acceleration or deceleration and maintains (holds)
the output frequency.
D Acceleration/deceleration is restarted when the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input is turned
OFF.
D The motor will be stopped if a stop command is input while the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold
input is ON.
D When constant d4-01 (the frequency reference hold function selector) is set to 1, the held frequency
will be stored in memory. This stored frequency will be retained even after a power loss and the motor
will be restarted at this frequency when a run command is input again.
7 - 66
Run/stop command OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON OFF ON
Acceleration/deceleration
ramp hold
Frequency reference
d4-01=1
Output frequency
d4-01=0
Hold Hold
D When d4-01 is set to 1, the held output frequency will be retained. To operate at this frequency even
after the Inverter is stopped, input the run command with the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input
ON.
D When d4-01 is set to 0, the output frequency will be held at zero if the run command is input with the
acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input ON.
OH2 Alarm Signal (Setting: B)
OFF Normal operation
ON Normal operation (The warning message OH2 will be displayed on the Digital Operator.)
D The message OH2 will be displayed on the Digital Operator while the multi-function input is ON
and the display will revert to its previous status when the input is turned OFF. (It isnt necessary to reset
the alarm.) The Inverter will continue operation without detecting a fault.
D With this setting, a temperature sensor can be connected to the multi-function input to display a warn-
ing message when the temperature rises too high.
Multi-function Analog Input Selection (Setting: C)
OFF Disables the multi-function analog input (terminal 16).
ON Enables the multi-function analog input (terminal 16).
D With this setting, the multi-function input can be used to enable or disable the multi-function analog 7
input.
D Turning the input OFF has the same effect as setting H3-05 (the multi-function analog input selector
for terminal 16) to 1F.
No V/f Control with PG (Setting: D)
OFF V/f control with PG feedback (enables speed control with speed feedback)
ON Normal V/f control (disables speed feedback control.)
D With this setting, the multi-function input can be used to switch V/f control with PG feedback to
Normal V/f control. It is possible to switch between these control methods during operation.
Speed Control Integral Reset (Setting: E)
OFF Operates with PI-control speed control loop.
ON Operates with P-control speed control loop. (The speed control integral values are reset by the
integral time constant.)
D This function is valid only for V/f control with PG feedback when constant F1-07 is set to 0. (Setting
F1-07 to 0 disables integral operation during acceleration/deceleration.)
D It is possible to switch between these speed control modes during operation.
7 - 67
7.5.5 External Terminal Functions: H
D With these settings, the multi-function inputs can be used to control the Inverters output frequency.
D When using this function, be sure to set both the up command (setting 10) and the down command
(setting 11) for 2 multi-function inputs. An OPE03 option fault will occur if only one of these com-
mands is set or if an acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input (setting A) is set at the same time.
D Be sure to set constant b1-02 (the run command source selector) to 1 (external terminal). The up/down
function wont operate with any other b1-02 setting.
D The frequency up/down commands operate according to the normal acceleration/deceleration times
in C1-01 to C1-08.
D The upper and lower limits for the output frequency with the up/down commands are determined by
the following settings:
Upper limit = Maximum output frequency (E1-04) Reference upper limit (d2-01) / 100
Lower limit = Maximum output frequency (E1-04) Reference lower limit (d2-02) / 100
D When frequency reference (voltage) terminal 13 or frequency reference (current) terminal 14 is being
used as a frequency reference input, the greatest frequency value becomes the lower limit (except when
UP and DOWN are OFF, and run command is turned ON.)
D When the up/down function is being used, the output frequency will be accelerated to the lower limit
if a run command is input.
D When the up/down function and jog frequency reference are both assigned to multi-function inputs,
an ON jog frequency reference input has the highest priority.
D Multi-step speed references 1 to 8 are all disabled when the up/down function has been set.
D The output frequency held by the up/down function will be stored in memory if d4-01 (the frequency
reference hold function selector) is set to 1. This output frequency will be retained even after a power
loss, and operation will be restarted at this frequency the next time that a run command is input. The
stored output frequency will be cleared from memory if the up or down command is turned ON while
the run command is OFF (see Reference frequency reset in Figure 7.36) .
7 - 68
Output frequency
Upper limit
Accelerates to d4-01=1
lower limit
Same frequency
d4-01=0
Lower limit
Forward/Stop ON
Up command ON
Reference frequency reset
ON
Down command
Power supply ON ON
The Speed Agree signal remains ON while the run command is ON and the motor is
not accelerating or decelerating.
D With this setting, the multi-function input resets faults that have occurred.
D When a fault has occurred, be sure to find out what kind of fault occurred, take steps to correct the cause
of the fault, and restart the Inverter. It is possible to damage the Inverter by repeatedly resetting a fault 7
without correcting the cause.
D To resume operation after a fault has occurred, turn the run command OFF, turn the fault reset input
from ON to OFF, and then turn the run command ON again. A fault cannot be reset while the run com-
mand is ON.
D If a fault hasnt occurred, turning the fault reset ON and OFF will have no effect on operation.
Motor Switch Command (Motor 2 Selection, Setting: 16)
D CLOSED: Motor 2 constants used.
Operation
Note Use an external sequence to switch between M1 and M2
and to confirm the motor selection status.
M1
U, V, W IM
Motor Switch command Motor 1 (main motor)
(T1, T2, T3)
(CLOSED for motor 2)
M2
Multi-function input IM Motor 2 (auxiliary motor)
The control method, V/f characteristics, and motor constants recorded in the Inverter can be
switched by setting 16 (motor switch command) for a constant from H1-01 to 06 (multi-function
inputs), and then inputting a signal while the motor is stopped.
7 - 69
7.5.5 External Terminal Functions: H
The current motor selection can be monitored at a multi-function output terminal by setting 1C
(motor selection monitor) for a constant from H2-01 to 03 (multi-function outputs).
Set the Basic (3) or Advanced (4) access level in the initialize setting A1-01 (access level).
The constants being used will changed as shown in the following table for the motor switch com-
mand.
Motor Switch command OPEN (motor 1) CLOSED (motor 2)
A1-02 (control method in initialize
Control method * E3-01 (motor 2 control method)
settings)
E4-01 to 07 (motor 2 V/f character-
V/f characteristics E1-04 to 13 (V/f characteristics)
istics)
E5-01 to 06 (motor 2 motor
Motor constants E2-01 to 09 (motor constants)
constants)
Motor selection monitor OPEN CLOSED
D When A1-02E3-01, the constants under 8.2.9 are initialized each time the motor is switched.
D The timing chart for switching between motor 1 and motor 2 is shown below.
OFF ON
Motor switch command
M1 operation
ON OFF
Motor switching
contactor
(Setting: 1C) OFF ON
M2 operation
OFF Approx. ON
Motor selection monitor
Approx. 200 ms 50 ms
D With this setting, the multi-function input switches between PID control and normal Inverter control.
This function can be used to perform trial operation or jog operation with normal inverter control
(open-loop control) and then switch to PID control (closed-loop control using feedback) after adjust-
ing the system. The PID disable function can also be used to switch to open-loop control when there
is a problem with the feedback value.
Constants Write Enable (Setting: 1B)
OFF Write-protects all constants except for frequency monitor.
ON Allows constants specified in Initialize mode to be changed.
D With this setting, the multi-function input can be used to write-protect the Operator constants. When
the input is OFF, the Operation mode frequency can be monitored and the frequency can be changed
but other changes are prohibited.
Trim Control Increase and Decrease (Settings: 1C and 1D)
Output frequency Reference frequency Reference frequency Reference fre- Reference fre-
+ trim control level trim control level quency quency
(d4-02) (d4-02)
Trim Control In- ON OFF ON OFF
crease
Trim Control De- OFF ON ON OFF
crease
7 - 70
D The trim control increase function adds the level in d4-02 to the analog frequency reference.
D The trim control decrease function subtracts the level in d4-02 to the analog frequency reference.
D These functions are effective when the frequency reference is input from an analog input. These func-
tions must both be set at the same time or an OPE03 fault will occur. The analog frequency reference
wont be changed when both the trim control increase and decrease inputs are ON. The output frequen-
cy will be zero when the trim control decrease input is ON and the result of the subtraction is less than
zero.
Analog Frequency Reference Sample/Hold (Setting: 1E)
D The analog input value will become the frequency reference 100 ms after the multi-function input
closes.
CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED
Sample/hold
command 100 100 100
ms ms ms
Analog input
Frequency
reference
D The analog frequency reference sample/hold function is valid only for terminals 13, 14, and 16 or for
the analog inputs from the AI-14U or AI-14B.
D An OPE03 fault will occur if two or more of the following signals turn ON at the same time: accelera-
tion/deceleration ramp hold command (0A), up/down commands (10 or 11), trim control increase/de-
crease commands (1C or 1D), and the analog frequency reference sample/hold command.
External Faults (Settings: 20 to 2F)
D With this setting, the multi-function input can be used to stop the Inverter or output an alarm when a
malfunction or fault occurs in a peripheral device.
D There are 16 external fault inputs available with all 16 combinations of the following variables. Select
the setting with the desired combination.
Input level: Normally open or normally closed
Detection method: Always or During operation only
Operation selection:
tion
Deceleration to stop, Coast to stop, Emergency stop, or Continue opera- 7
Table 7.9 External Fault Settings
Input level Detection method Operation selection
Decel- Emer-
Setting Continue
NO con- NC con- During eration to Coast to gency
Always operation
tact tact operation stop stop (Fault) stop
(Alarm)
(Fault) (Fault)
20 f f f
21 f f f
22 f f f
23 f f f
24 f f f
25 f f f
26 f f f
27 f f f
28 f f f
29 f f f
2A f f f
2B f f f
2C f f f
2D f f f
7 - 71
7.5.5 External Terminal Functions: H
D For the input level, select whether you want a fault to be detected when the input signal is ON (normally
open input) or OFF (normally closed input).
D For the detection method, select whether you want faults to be detected any time that the Inverter is
ON or only during operation.
D For the operation selection, select the processing method that you want to be performed when a fault
has been detected.
Deceleration to stop: A fault is output and the output stopped in the selected deceleration time.
Coast to stop: A fault is output and the Inverter output is cut off.
Emergency stop: A fault is output and the output stopped in the emergency stop time (C1-09).
Continue operation: An alarm is output and operation continues.
D When an alarm is going to be output externally, be sure to set one of the multi-function outputs (H2-01,
02, and 03) to alarm (setting 10).
D An external fault setting cannot be set in more than one multi-function input.
D Unlike other constant settings, the external fault settings have an input procedure, as shown in the fol-
lowing diagrams.
Setting Procedure
1. When setting an external fault function, press the Enter Key when External Fault is displayed to
bring up the Input Level display.
DATA
ENTER
ESC
7 Detection
method
Operation
Selection
7 - 72
DATA DATA
ENTER ENTER
ESC
NC Contact
DATA DATA
ENTER ENTER
During operation
DATA DATA
ENTER ENTER
Coast to Stop
7
Emergency Stop
Continue
operation
7 - 73
7.5.5 External Terminal Functions: H
D DC injection braking is used to prevent the motor from rotating due to inertia or external forces when
the Inverter is stopped.
D DC injection braking is performed if the DC injection braking input is ON while the Inverter is stopped.
D If a run command or jog command (jog, forward jog, or reverse jog) is input, the DC injection braking
will be cleared and motor operation will be started.
DC injection OFF ON
braking com-
mand
Output
DC DC
frequency braking braking
7 D Either one of the external search functions can be set, but not both.
D The speed search function can be used to operate the motor without tripping when switching operation
from a commercial power supply and the Inverter or starting a coasting motor.
D The speed search will begin after the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) has elapsed when the run com-
mand is input after the external search command has been turned ON.
7 - 74
D With this setting, the multi-function input can be used to switch between speed and torque control. Re-
fer to 7.3.4 Speed/Torque Control Switching Function for more details.
Zero-servo Command (Setting: 72)
OFF Normal operation
ON Zero-servo when the frequency (speed) reference falls below the zero-speed level in b2-01.
D With this setting, the multi-function input controls the zero-servo function (b9-01 and b9-02).
D When the zero-servo command is ON, a position control loop is formed and the motor is completely
stopped when the frequency (speed) reference falls below the excitation level set in b2-01. Refer to
7.3.2 Zero-servo Function for more details.
Speed Control (ASR) Proportional Gain Switch (Setting: 77)
OFF The gain is set according to the values in C5-01, C5-03, and C5-07.
ON The gain is set to the value in C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2).
D With this setting, the multi-function input switches the proportional gain used in speed control (ASR).
The integral time is not changed.
D Refer to 6.4.4 Speed Control (ASR) Structure for more details on constants C5-01, C5-03, and C5-07.
7 - 75
7.5.5 External Terminal Functions: H
7 17
18
Overtorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
Overtorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON)
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
19 Overtorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) f f f f
1A During reverse run (ON: During reverse run) f f f f
1B During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock) f f f f
1C Motor selection (Motor under selection)
1D Regenerating (ON: Regenerating) f
1E Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled) f f f f
1F Motor overload (OL1) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level) f f f f
20 Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting) f f f f
30 During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit) f f
31 During speed reference limit. (ON: During speed reference limit) f
33 Zero-servo end (ON: Zero-servo function completed) f
37 During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop. f f f f
7 - 76
Constant Settings
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Multi-function input
H2-01 0 to 37 0 B B B B
(terminal 9-10)
Multi-function input
H2-02 0 to 37 1 B B B B
(terminal 25)
Multi-function input
H2-03 0 to 37 2 B B B B
(terminal 26)
D The following table shows the settings and section references for functions that are described in more
detail in this chapter.
Function Setting Section
Frequency Agree 1 2
Desired Frequency Agree 1 3 L4 01 to L4-05
Frequency Detection Settings: L4-01 L4 05 in
Frequency Detection 1 4 7.5.6
Frequency Detection 2 5
Overtorque Detection Settings: L6-01 to L6-06 in
Overtorque Detection 1 (NO) B
7.5.6
Loss of Frequency Reference C
Timer Functions: b4
b4-01,
01 b4 02 in 77.5.1
b4-02 51
Timer Function Output 12
Frequency Agree 2 13
Desired Frequency Agree 2 14 L4 01 to L4-05
Frequency Detection Settings: L4-01 L4 05 in
Frequency Detection 3 15 7.5.6
Frequency Detection 4 16
Overtorque Detection 1 (NC) 17
Overtorque Detection 2 (NO) 18 Overtorque Detection Settings: L6-01 to L6-06 in
7.5.6
Overtorque Detection 2 (NC) 19
D Refer to Table 7.10 Multi-function Output Functions for information on the following functions.
7
Function Setting
Inverter Operation Ready 6
DC Bus Undervoltage 7
During Baseblock 8
Frequency Reference Selection 9
Run Command Selection A
Braking Resistor Fault D
Fault E
Minor Fault 10
Fault Reset Command Active 11
During Reverse Run 1A
During Baseblock 2 1B
Regenerating 1D
Restart Enabled 1E
During Torque Limit (Current Limit) 30
During Speed Limit 31
7 - 77
7.5.5 External Terminal Functions: H
Output frequency
Zero-speed (Setting: 1)
The output frequency is greater than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
OFF
(With flux vector control, is greater than the zero speed level (b2-01).)
The output frequency is less than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
ON
(With flux vector control, is less than the zero speed level (b2-01).)
7
Zero-speed output OFF ON
D This output function is valid when the motor overload protection function is enabled (L1-01 =1).
D This output can be used to warn of overheating before the protection function itself operates.
Inverter Overheat (OH) Pre-alarm (Setting: 20)
OFF The cooling fin temperature is less than the OH Pre-Alarm Level set in L8-02.
ON The cooling fin temperature exceeds the OH Pre-Alarm Level set in L8-02.
D This output function indicates that the temperature of the cooling fins reaches the temperature set in
L8-02 (the Inverter overheating alarm detection level).
7 - 78
Speed reference limit (Setting: 31)
OFF Other than ON condition
ON Enables the speed reference limit in the following conditions (During flux vector control mode):
1. Frequency reference Frequency reference upper limit (d2-01)
Frequency reference Frequency reference lower limit (d2-02)
Frequency reference Output frequency lower limit of the multi-function analog input
(Setting: 9)
2. The frequency reference is less than the Min. output frequency (E1-09), and b1-05 is set to 1,
2, or 5.
D This output function indicates that zero-servo position control has been completed.
D The output is turned ON after the zero-servo command is input and the difference between the zero-ser-
vo operation starting position and the current position is within the zero servo completion width
(b9-02).
J Multi-function Analog Input/Frequency Reference (Current): H3-05, H3-09
Constant Settings
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Multi-function ana-
H3-05 log input (terminal 0 to 1F 0 B B B B
16)
Multi-function ana-
H3-09 log input (terminal 1 to 1F 1F A A A A
14)
7
tor
7 - 79
7.5.5 External Terminal Functions: H
D The analog input signal level, gain, and bias are set with the following constants.
Terminal 16 signal level selector H3-04 (0 to +10 V or 0 to 10 V)
Terminal 16 input gain H3-06
Terminal 16 input bias H3-07
Terminal 14 signal level selector H3-08 (0 to +10 V, 0 to 10 V, or 4 to 20 mA)
Terminal 14 input gain H3-10
Terminal 14 input bias H3-11
D When a voltage input is being input to terminal 14, be sure to disconnect jumper wire J1 on the control
PC board.
D The input resistance will be destroyed if a voltage input is used without disconnecting the jumper wire.
(Refer to Torque Reference Settings: H3-04, H3-05, H3-08, H3-09 in 7.3.3.)
D Set the time constant in constant H3-12 when adding a primary delay filter to an analog input. This
filter time constant applies to all three of the analog inputs.
D Settings 2 and D cannot be set at the same time. OPE07 will be detected.
7 - 80
Analog Input Characteristics
D Analog input characteristics for a gain of 100.0% and a bias of 0.0% are shown for setting examples
in Table 7.12.
D To set over 100% for a 10 V input (e.g., 300%/10 V), set the gain to 300% in H3-06 for terminal 16
and H3-10 for terminal 14.
Table 7.12 Analog Input Characteristics
S Auxiliary Frequency Reference (Setting: 0) S Frequency Gain (Setting: 1) S Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain (Set-
S Frequency Bias (Setting: 2) S Output Voltage Bias (Setting: 4) ting: 5)
S PID Feedback (Setting: B) S DC Injection Braking Current (Setting: 6)
S Frequency reference (H3-09 setting: 1F)
100 %
100 % 100 %
50 %
20 %
10 V 10 %
10 V 0 10 V 10 V 0 1V 2V 5V 10 V
0 10 V
S DC Injection Braking Current (Setting: 6) S Stall Prevention Level (Setting: 8) S Output Frequency Lower Limit (Setting: 9)
S Overtorque Detection Level (Setting: 7) S Jump Frequency (Setting: A)
30 %
7
10 V 0 10 V 10 V 0 10 V
10 V 0 3V 10 V
S Torque Reference (Setting: 13) S Forward Torque Limit (Setting: 10) S Forward/Reverse Torque (Speed) Limit (Set-
S Torque Compensation Bias (Setting: 14) S Reverse Torque Limit (Setting: 11) ting: 15)
S Regenerative Torque Limit (Setting: 12)
100 %
100 % 100 %
10 V
0 10 V 10 V 0 10 V 0 10 V
100 % 100 %
7 - 81
7.5.5 External Terminal Functions: H
Monitor selection
H4-01 1 to 38 2 B B B B
(terminal 21)
Monitor selection
H4-04 1 to 38 3 B B B B
(terminal 23)
D The multi-function outputs can be set to monitor any of the U1 Inverter status items by setting the last
two digits of the constant number (U1-jj).
Refer to page 4 - 12 for a table listing all of these U1 settings.
D Settings 4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 28, 34 and 35 cant be set and settings 29, 30, and 31 arent used.
Adjusting the Monitor Output: H4-02, -03, -05, -06
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Mul-
H4-02 Gain (terminal 21) f 0.00 to 2.50 1.00 B B B B
tiple
10.0 to
H4-03 Bias (terminal 21) f % 0.0 B B B B
+10.0
Mul-
H4-05 Gain (terminal 23) f 0.00 to 2.50 0.50 B B B B
tiple
10.0 to
H4-06 Bias (terminal 23) f % 0.0 B B B B
+10.0
D For the output gain, set what multiple of 10 V will correspond to a 100% output of the monitored item.
D For the output bias, set the amount that the output characteristic will be shifted vertically.
Set this amount as a percentage, with 10 V corresponding to 100%.
Output voltage
Gain 10 V
7 10 V
Bias 10 V
100
0V Monitored item
0% 100 %
D Settings
Setting Function
0 0 to +10 V (Absolute value output)
1 0 to 10 V
D This signal level setting applies to analog outputs 1 and 2 (terminals 21 and 23).
D When the 0 to 10 V signal level is used to output speed values (frequency reference, output frequency,
or motor speed), positive voltage indicates Inverter output in the forward direction and negative volt-
age indicates Inverter output in the reverse direction. (Assuming a bias setting of 0.0.)
D There are some monitor items that are limited to the 0 to +10 V signal range even when the 0 to 10 V
signal level has been selected. Refer to Table 4.3 Status Monitor Items for details.
7 - 82
J MEMOBUS Communications Settings: H5-01 to H5-05
H5-02 Communication 0 to 4 3 A A A A
speed selection
D Settings
Setting Baud Rate
0 1200 bps
1 2400 bps
2 4800 bps
3 9600 bps
4 19200 bps
Communication par-
H5-03 0 to 2 0 A A A A
ity selection
Settings
7
D
Setting Function
0 No parity
1 Even parity
2 Odd parity
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Deceleration to stop (deceleration time:C1-02)
1 Coast to stop
2 Emergency stop (deceleration time:C1-09)
3 Continue operation (display only)
7 - 83
7.5.6 Protective Functions: L
Communication er-
H5-05 ror detection selec- 0, 1 1 A A A A
tion
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Do not detect as communications error.
1 Detect as communications error.
Motor protection
L1-01 0, 1 1 B B B B
selection
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disabled.
1 Enabled.
D Normally it isnt necessary to change this setting. (The factory setting is a 150%, 1 minute capacity.)
D Set the electronic thermal protection operation time if a 150% overload is applied after operating con-
tinuously at the motors rated current (hot start).
D When the motors overload capacity level is known, set the hot-start overload resistance level for the
motor, but be sure to allow some margin for safety.
D Decrease this setting when you want to detect an overload more quickly.
7 - 84
Electronic Thermal Time Characteristics
In this example, L1-02 is set to 1 minute, the motor is operating at 60 Hz, and general-purpose
motor characteristics (EI-02=0) are used.
Operating time (minutes)
10
7
3
Cold start
0.4
Hot start
Momentary power
L2-01 0 to 2 0 B B B B
loss detection
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (An undervoltage fault is detected when there is a momentary power loss.)
Enabled. (Restarts if power is restored within the L2-02 time. An under-voltage fault is detected
1
for a longer power loss.)
Enabled during CPU operation. (Restarts if power is restored while the CPU is operating. An
2
undervoltage fault is not detected.)
7
D This constant specifies the processing that is performed when a momentary power loss occurs.
D When power loss ridethru is enabled (setting 1 or 2), operation will be restarted after a speed search
if the power is restored within the allowed time interval.
D When power loss ridethru is disabled (setting 0), an undervoltage fault will be detected if power is in-
terrupted for more than 15 ms.
Momentary Power Loss Ridethru Time: L2-02
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Momentary power
L2-02 0.0 to 2.0 s 0.7 B B B B
loss ridethru time
D The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The factory setting shown in the table is for a 200
V class, 0.4 kW Inverter. (See page 8 - 47.)
D This setting is valid only when constant L2-01 is set to 1. Set the power loss ridethru time in seconds.
7 - 85
7.5.6 Protective Functions: L
D The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The factory setting shown in the table is for a 200
V class, 0.4 kW Inverter. (See page 8 - 47.)
D This setting is used with the speed search and DC injection braking functions.
D Set the time required for the leakage voltage to dissipate. Increase the setting if an overcurrent (OC)
occurs when the speed search or DC injection braking function starts.
D This setting is valid for speed searches performed after a momentary power loss and regular speed
searches.
Voltage Recovery Time: L2-04
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Voltage recovery
L2-04 0.0 to 5.0 s 0.3 A A A A
time
D Set the time allowed for the normal voltage to be restored after completion of the speed search.
For a 200 V class Inverter, this is the time in seconds for voltage to be restored from 0 VAC to 200 VAC.
For a 400 V class Inverter, this is the time in seconds for voltage to be restored from 0 VAC to 400 VAC.
D This setting is valid for speed searches after a momentary power loss, regular speed searches, the volt-
age changes with energy-saving control, and the voltage changes with baseblock clearing.
Undervoltage Detection Level: L2-05
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D The values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters. (See page 8 - 49.)
D Normally it isnt necessary to change this setting.
7 D Use this constant when you want to add an AC reactor and lower the main circuit undervoltage detec-
tion level. Be sure to set a main circuit DC voltage value (V) that will detect a main circuit undervol-
tage.
KEB Deceleration Rate: L2-06
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
KEB deceleration
L2-06 0.0 to 100.0 0.1 0.0 A A A A
rate
D The KEB function restores the operating conditions for momentary power loss by applying a frequen-
cy deceleration to create inertia energy when a power loss occurs, and thus avoid the power loss.
D This function is normally used with film lines and other applications where multiple Inverters are con-
nected to the main DC line. Synchronous deceleration for power loss prevents the line from stopping
as the result of speed fluctuations.
D The KEB operation is performed using a KEB command (setting of 65 or 66) for a multi-function in-
put.
D Applicable Capacities
200 V class Inverters: 0.4 to 15 kW
400 V class Inverters: 0.4 to 18.5 kW
Operation
D L2-06 = 0
The motor is automatically decelerated based on the emergency stop time (C1-09) so that the DC main-
line voltage does not go below the UV level. The momentary power loss ridethru time (L2-02) is not
used.
7 - 86
D L2-06 0
The motor is decelerated to the KEB frequency level using the momentary power loss ridethru time
(L2-02) and then is accelerated to the original frequency reference using acceleration time 1 (C1-01).
The KEB frequency level is calculated from the KEB frequency rate using the following equation.
KEB frequency level = Output frequency before power loss [1 (setting of L2-06)/100)]%
OFF ON OFF
KEB command
(H1-01 to H1-06 = 65 or 66)
Output frequency
Stall prevention
L3-01 selection during ac- 0 to 2 1 B B B
cel
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (Accelerate according to the settings. Stalls may occur with large loads.)
1 Enabled. (Stop acceleration if L3-02 setting is exceeded. Accelerate again when current recov-
ers.)
2 Optimum acceleration (Adjust acceleration so that the L3-02 isnt exceeded by much. Disregard
the acceleration time setting.)
7
D When setting 1 (enabled) is selected, acceleration is stopped if the motor current exceeds the accelera-
tion stall prevention level. Acceleration is started again when the current falls below this level. The
acceleration time can be longer than the setting depending on the load.
D When setting 2 (optimum acceleration) is selected, acceleration is performed using the acceleration
stall prevention level as a basis. In this case, the acceleration time is disregarded.
7 - 87
7.5.6 Protective Functions: L
Output current
L3-02 (Acceleration stall prevention level)
Time
Output frequency
Time
L3-03
(Acceleration stall prevention
limit)
Output frequency
E1-06
Base frequency (FA)
Note When the motor is used in the high-speed range, the acceleration stall prevention level
is automatically lowered to provide smoother acceleration.
The acceleration stall prevention limit (L3-03) limits how much the acceleration stall
prevention level is lowered so that it isnt lowered any more than necessary.
7 - 88
Stall Prevention Selection During Decel: L3-04
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Stall prevention
L3-04 selection during de- 0 to 3 1 B B B B
cel
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (Decelerate according to the settings. Main circuit overvoltage may occur if the decel-
eration time is too short.)
1 Enabled. (Stops deceleration if the main circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage level. Decelerate
again when voltage recovers.)
2 Optimum deceleration. (Decelerate as fast as possible judging from the main circuit voltage.
Disregard the deceleration time setting.)
3 Enabled (with braking resistor)
D When setting 1 (enabled) is selected, the deceleration time is extended automatically so that a main
circuit overvoltage doesnt occur.
D Always select setting 0 or 3 when a braking option (Braking Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, or Brak-
ing Unit) is being used. If setting 1 or 2 is selected, the braking option wont be used and the decelera-
tion time cant be shortened.
D L3-04 cannot be set to 2 for open-loop vector control mode. (Settings can be made for SPEC:F and
later)
D L3-04=3 cannot be set in open-loop vector control mode.
Time
7
Deceleration time
(setting)
Stall prevention
L3-05 selection during run- 0 to 2 1 B B
ning
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (Run according to the settings. Stalls may occur with large loads.)
1 Enabled deceleration time 1. (Use deceleration time in C1-02 for stall prevention function.)
2 Enabled deceleration time 2. (Use deceleration time in C1-04 for stall prevention function.)
D When setting 1 or 2 (enabled) is selected, deceleration is started if the current of the stall prevention
level during operation continues for more than 100 ms. The motor is accelerated back to the reference
frequency again when the current falls below this level.
7 - 89
7.5.6 Protective Functions: L
Output current
Time
Output frequency
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
7 Speed agree detec-
tion Vector
D Set these constants when outputting one of the frequency agree or frequency detection signals from
a multi-function output. Table 7.13 shows the relationship between these constants and the output sig-
nals.
Table 7.13 Constants and Output Signals
Constant Related output settings Constant function
7 - 90
Constant Related output settings Constant function
D Set the corresponding setting in the multi-function output (H2-01, H2-02, or H2-03) to output the de-
sired Fref/Fout Agree signal, Fref/Set Agree signal, or Frequency Detection signal.
Function Setting
Fref/Fout Agree 1 2
Fref/Set Agree 1 3
Frequency Detection 1 4
Frequency Detection 2 5
Fref/Fout Agree 2 13
Fref/Set Agree 2 14
Frequency Detection 3 15
Frequency Detection 4 16
D The frequency reference is considered lost when the frequency reference voltage drops by 90% for
more than 400 ms.
D Settings
Setting Function
0
7
Stop. (Operate according to the frequency reference value.)
1 Continue operation at 80% speed. (Continue operation with a speed that is 80% of the value
when the frequency reference was lost.)
7 - 91
7.5.6 Protective Functions: L
L4-01 L4-03
Output frequency
Output frequency
or motor speed
Fref/Set or motor speed
Agree
L4-01
L4-02
L4-01 L4-03
L4-01
7 L4-02
L4-01 L4-03
L4-01
L4-02
7 - 92
J Fault Restart Settings: L5-01, L5-02
D The fault restart function automatically restarts the Inverter even when an internal fault occurs during
Inverter operation. Use this function only when continuing operation is more important than possibly
damaging the Inverter.
D The fault restart function is effective with the following faults. With other faults, the protective opera-
tions will engage immediately without attempting to restart operation.
S OC (Overcurrent) S PF (Main circuit voltage fault) S OL1 (Motor overload)
S GF (Ground fault) S LF (Output open-phase) S OL2 (Inverter overload)
S PUF (Fuse blown) S RF (Braking resistor over- S OL3 (Overtorque)
heated)
S OV (Main circuit overvoltage) S RR (Braking transistor fault) S OL4 (Overtorque)
S UV1 (Main circuit undervol-
tage)
D When one of the multi-function outputs (H2-01, H2-02, or H2-03) is set to 1E (Restart Enabled), the
output will be ON while the fault restart function is in progress.
Auto Restart Operation Selection: L5-02
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Settings
7
Setting Function
0 Do not output fault restart. (The fault contact does not operate.)
1 Output fault restart. (The fault contact operates.)
IMPORTANT The Inverter might be damaged when using the fault restart function too frequently.
Understanding that the Inverter might be damaged, be sure to take the following precautions:
Always set up a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB).
Set up a sequence that will stop peripheral equipment when an Inverter fault occurs.
7 - 93
7.5.6 Protective Functions: L
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Torque detection
L6-01 0 to 4 0 B B B B
selection 1
Torque detection
L6-02 0 to 300 % 150 B B B B
level 1
Torque detection
L6-03 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.1 B B B B
time 1
Torque detection
L6-04 0 to 4 0 A A A A
selection 2
Torque detection
L6-05 0 to 300 % 150 A A A A
level 2
Torque detection
L6-06 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.1 A A A A
time 2
D The overtorque detection function detects an excessive mechanical load from an increase in the output
current (or output torque).
D The settings in the torque detection selection constants (L6-01 and L6-04) determine whether overtor-
que conditions will be detected and what kind of processing will be performed if a overtorque condi-
tion is detected.
D L6-01/L6-04 Settings
Setting Function Display
0 Overtorque detection disabled Overtorque detection 1 Overtorque output 2
Detect only during speed agree. Continue
1 operation even after detection. (Minor OL3 blinks OL4 blinks
fault)
Detect overtorque at any time. Continue
2 operation even after detection. (Minor OL3 blinks OL4 blinks
fault)
Detect only during speed agree. Stop out-
3 OL3 lights OL4 lights
put after detection. (Fault)
Detect overtorque at any time. Stop output
4 OL3 lights OL4 lights
after detection. (Fault)
7 D When overtorque detection is enabled, be sure to set the overtorque detection level (L6-02 or L6-05)
and the overtorque detection time (L6-02 or L6-05). An overtorque condition is detected when the cur-
rent exceeds the overtorque detection level for longer than the overtorque detection time.
D The overtorque detection level settings depend on the control method:
Open-loop or flux vector control: Set as a percentage of the motor rated torque.
Normal V/f or V/f with PG feedback control: Set as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
D Any of the following functions can be set in a multi-function output (H2-01, H2-02, or H2-03) to indi-
cate fact that an overtorque condition has been detected.
S Setting B: Overtorque detection 1 (NO) S Setting 18: Overtorque detection 2 (NO)
S Setting 17: Overtorque detection 1 (NC) S Setting 19: Overtorque detection 2 (NC)
Motor current
(Output torque) : :
L6-02 or L6-05
L6-03 L6-03
Overtorque Detection 1 (N.O.) or or
or Overtorque Detection 2 L6-06 L6-06
ON ON
(N.O.)
* The overtorque detection is cleared when the current drops about 5% of the
Inverters rated current (or the motors rated torque).
7 - 94
J Hardware Protection Settings: L8-01 to L8-03, L8-05, L8-07
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (Select 0 when a braking resistor isnt being used or a Braking Resistor Unit is being
used.)
1 Enabled. (Protects the braking resistor from overheating.)
Overheat pre-alarm
L8-02 50 to 110 _C 95 A A A A
level
Operation selection
L8-03 after overheat pre- 0 to 3 3 A A A A
alarm
D Constant L8-02 specifies the detection temperature in C for the Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm
function. An overheat pre-alarm occurs when the temperature of the cooling fins reaches this level.
D Constant L8-03 specifies the processing that will be performed when an overheat pre-alarm occurs.
Apart from this setting, cooling fin overheating (OH1) is detected as a protection function at 105_C.
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Decelerates to a stop in the deceleration time set in C1-09. (Protection operation: Fault contacts
operate)
1 Coast to stop. (Protection operation: Fault contacts operate)
2 Emergency stop in the emergency-stop time set in C1-09. (Protection operation: Fault contacts
operate)
7
3 Continues operation. (Alarm: Monitor display only.)
Input open-phase
L8-05 0, 1 0 A A A A
protection selection
D This function detects changes in the main circuit DC voltage which indicate a power supply open-
phase, large imbalance in the power supply voltage, or deterioration of the main circuit capacitor.
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disabled.
1 Enabled. (Detects input power supply open-phase, 3-phase imbalance, or deterioration of the
main circuit capacitor.)
7 - 95
7.5.6 Protective Functions: L
Output open-phase
L8-07 0, 1 0 A A A A
protection selection
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disabled.
1 Enabled. (Detects an output open-phase at under 10% of the Inverters rated output current.)
D When the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity, false open-phase detection may
occur or open-phase cannot be detected. In this case, disable the detection function by setting L8-07
to 0.
Carrier Frequency Reduction Selection: L8-17 (for SPEC: F)
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D Settings
Setting Function
0 No carrier frequency reduction.
1 With carrier frequency reduction.
2 For factory adjustments.
3 For factory adjustments.
D If metallic noise (carrier noise) from the motor is a problem when carrier frequency is reduced (less
than 6 Hz), set L8-17 to 0 (no carrier frequency reduction), and L8-19 (OL2 characteristics selection
at low speeds) to 1 (enabled).
7 D Do not L8-17 and L8-19 to 0 at the same time when using V/f control and open loop vector control.
OL2 characteristics Selection at Low Speeds: L8-19 (for SPEC: F)
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
OL2 characteristics
L8-19 selection at low 0, 1 0 A A A A
speeds
D Settings
Setting Function
0 OL2 characteristics at low speeds disabled.
1 OL2 characteristics at low speeds enabled.
D When using OL2 to trip at low speeds (less than 6 Hz) despite a light load, set L8-17 to 1 (with carrier
frequency reduction) and L8-19 (OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds) to 0 (disabled).
However, do not set l8-19 to 0 for 400 V class, 185 to 300 kW Inverters.
D Do not L8-17 and L8-19 to 0 at the same time when using V/f control and open loop vector control.
D Reduce the carrier frequency (C6-01) to 2 kHz when continuously operating at low speeds with heavy
loads when using flux vector control.
7 - 96
7.5.7 Operator Constants: o
D In operation mode, the frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage can
be monitored immediately if the factory settings are being used. One of these four values, the output
voltage, can be changed to a different value.
D When you want to monitor a value other than the output voltage, set that number in constant o1-01.
D Use the last two digits from the U1 Monitor list (U1-jj) to select a value. Refer to Table 4.3.
Monitor Selection After Power Up: o1-02
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D When the power is turned on, the frequency reference will appear in the Units data display if the facto-
ry settings are being used.
D Any one of the four values monitored at startup (frequency reference, output frequency, output current,
or the value set in constant o1-01) can be selected to appear when the power is turned ON.
D Change the setting of constant o1-02 to display an item other than the frequency reference at startup.
D Settings
Setting Function
1 The frequency reference is displayed at start-up.
2 The output frequency is displayed at start-up.
3 The output current is displayed at start-up.
4 The value set in constant o1-01 is displayed at start-up.
7
Frequency Units of Reference Setting and Monitor: o1-03
D Set the unit for frequency setting and monitoring.
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Frequency units of
o1-03 reference setting and 0 to 39999 0 B B B B
monitor
D Settings
Setting Unit
0 0.01 Hz
1 0.01%
r/min (0 to 3999)
2 to 39
r/min = 120 frequency reference (Hz) / o1-03 (number of motor poles)
Use the 5th digit of o1-03 to specify the decimal point.
5th digit = 0: VVVV
5th digit = 1: VVV . V
5th digit = 2: VV . VV
5th digit = 3: V . VVV
40 to 39999 The 1st to 4th digits of o1-03 determine the frequency setting
Ex 1: To set the 100% speed to 200.0, set o1-03 to 12000.
200.0 will be displayed for 100%, 120 will be displayed for 60%.
Ex 2: To set the 100% speed to 65.00, set o1-03 to 26500.
65.00 will be displayed for 100%, 39.00 will be displayed for 60%.
7 - 97
7.5.7 Operator Constants: o
Frequency units of
o1-04 0, 1 0 B
constant setting
D Settings
Setting Unit
0 Unit of setting: Hz
1 Unit of setting: r/min
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Display constant number
1 Display constant number (address) set for MEMOBUS communications
LOCAL/REMOTE
o2-01 0, 1 1 B B B B
key enable/disable
7 D This constant enables or disables the LOCAL/REMOTE Key (the Operation Mode Selector Key) on
the Digital Operator.
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disabled. (Cannot change between local and remote.)
1 Enabled. (Pressing the LOCAL/REMOTE Key switches control of operation between the Oper-
ator and the sources specified in constants b1-01 and b1-02.)
7 - 98
User Constant Initial Value: o2-03
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D The Digital Operation display will return to 0 after the settings have been made.
kVA Selection: o2-04
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory Open
Opera- Range Setting V/f V/f with Flux
Number Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
D The setting range and factory setting depend on the Inverter capacity. The settings shown in the table
are for a 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverter. (See page 8 - 47.)
D Do not change this constant setting; it is used by the manufacturer to identify the Inverter model.
D Use this setting only the the control PC board has been replaced.
Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection: o2-05
User Change
g Valid Access Levels
Constant Name during Setting Unit Factory
7
V/f V/f with Open Flux
Number Opera- Range Setting Control PG Loop Vector
tion Vector
Frequency reference
o2-05 setting method selec- 0, 1 0 A A A A
tion
D This constant determines whether it is necessary to press the Enter Key when changing the frequency
reference with the Digital Operators frequency reference monitor; it cannot be changed during opera-
tion.
D When o2-05 is set to 1 (DATA/ENTER Key input not required.), the frequency reference changes si-
multaneously with the Digital Operators value.
D Settings
Setting Function
0 DATA/ENTER Key input required.
1 DATA/ENTER Key input not required.
Operation selection
o2-06 when digital opera- 0, 1 0 A A A A
tor is disconnected
D If the Digital Operator has command rights, this constant specifies whether to stop operation when the
Digital Operator is disconnected.
7 - 99
7.5.7 Operator Constants: o
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Disable Operator detection. (Continue operation when the Digital Operator is disconnected.)
Enable Operator detection. (Detect an OPR fault when the Digital Operator is disconnected,
1
stop the Inverter output, and operate the fault contact.)
Cumulative opera-
o2-07 0 to 65535 h 0 A A A A
tion time setting
Cumulative opera-
o2-08 0, 1 0 A A A A
tion time selection
D Set the initial elapsed time in constant o2-07. The elapsed operating time will start from this value.
D Constant o2-08 determines whether the elapsed operating time is the time that the Inverter is on or the
time that the Inverter is running.
D Settings
Setting Function
0 Inverter power-on time. (Counts the elapsed time from start-up until power is turned off.)
1 Inverter running time. (Counts the elapsed time that there is an Inverter output.)
7 - 100
8
User Constants
This chapter lists all user constants that can be used in the Programming and
Initialize modes.
8-1
User Constants
2: German
A1-00 3: French 0, 1 1 f Q Q Q Q 4 - 19
4: Italian
Select Language 5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
:This constant is not changed by
the initialize operation.
8-2
8.1 Initialize Mode Constants
8-3
User Constants
8-4
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
8-5
User Constants
8.2.1 Application Constants: b
J DC InjectionBraking: b2
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
8-6
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Speed Search: b3
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
* When the control method is changed, the Inverter reverts to factory settings. (The open loop vector control factory settings will
be displayed.)
J Timer Function: b4
8
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
8-7
User Constants
8.2.1 Application Constants: b
J PID Control: b5
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is D-con-
PID control mode trolled.)
selection
2: Enabled (Feedback value is D-
controlled.)
b5-01
b5 01 3: PID control enabled (frequency 0 to 4 0 A A A A 7 - 49
command + PID output, D
control of deviation)
PID Mode 4: PID control enabled (frequency
command + PID output, D
control of feedback value).
8-8
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Dwell Functions: b6
Con
Con- Name Change Control Methods
stant Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Num- Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector
ber PG Vector
Dwell frequency
at start 0.0 to
b6 01
b6-01 Run command
400.0 00
0.0 A A A A 7 - 52
Dwell Ref @ ON OFF
Start
Output frequency
Dwell time at start
b6-02 0.0
0 0 to 0.0 A A A A 7 - 52
Dwell Time @ 10.0
Start
Time
Dwell frequency b6-01 b6-03
b6-03
b6 03 at stop 0.0 to 0.0 A A A A 7 - 52
b6 02
b6-02 b6-04
b6 04 400 0
400.0
Dwell Ref @ Stop
:The dwell function is used to hold the
Dwell time at stop output frequency temporarily when
b6-04 driving a motor with a heavy load.
load 0.0
0 0 to 0.0 A A A A 7 - 52
Dwell Time @ 10.0
Stop
J Droop Control: b7
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Page
8
Open
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
8-9
User Constants
8.2.1 Application Constants: b
J Energy Saving: b8
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
J Zero Servo: b9
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
8 Zero-servo comple-
tion width
:Enabled when the zero-servo
completion (end) is set for a
multi-function input. The zero-
servo completion signal is ON
when the current position is 0 to
b9-02
b9 02 within the range (the zero-servo 10 A 7 - 19
16383
position + zero-servo comple-
tion width.)
Set the allowable position dis-
Zero Servo Count placement from the zero-servo
position to 4 times the pulse
rate of the PG (pulse generator,
encoder) in use.
8 - 10
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
* The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will differ according to the setting for C1-10 (the unit for acceleration/de-
celeration time.) When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/deceleration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
8 - 11
User Constants
8.2.2 Autotuning Constants: C
J S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
Con
Con- Name Change Control Methods
stant Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Num- Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector
ber PG Vector
S-curve charac-
teristic time at ac- 0.0 to
C2-01 celeration start 2.50 0.20 A A A A 7 - 52
All sections of the S-curve characteristic
SCrv Acc @ Start time are set in seconds units.
S-curve charac- :When the S-curve characteristic time is
teristic time at ac- set, the accel/decel times will increase
by only half of the S-curve characteris- 0.0 to
C2-02 celeration end 2.50 0.20 A A A A 7 - 52
tic times at start and end
end.
SCrv Acc @ End
Run com- OFF
ON
S-curve charac- mand
teristic time at de- Output frequency
C2-03
C2 03 celeration start C1-02 C1-03
C 03 0.00 to 0.20 A A A A 7 - 52
2 50
2.50
SCrv Dec @
Start C1-01 C1-04
S-curve charac-
teristic time at de- Time 0.00 to
C2-04 celeration end 2.50 0.00 A A A A 7 - 52
SCrv Dec @ End
8 - 12
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
* When the control method is changed, the Inverter reverts to factory settings. (The open loop vector control factory settings will
be displayed.)
J Torque Compensation: C4
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
8
tion gain when in open-loop vec-
tor control mode.
The torque compensation delay
time is set in ms units.
Torque compensation
time constant :Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circum-
stances: 0 to
C4-02
C4 02 20 * A A A 7 - 55
Wh the
S When th motort iis oscillating,
ill ti 10000
increase the set values.
Torq Comp Time S When the responsiveness of the
motor is low, decrease the set
values.
Start torque com-
pensation Sets start torque compensation
C4-03 (forward rotation) with the motors rated torque at 0 to 200 0.0 A 7-9
100%
100%.
F TorqCmp@ Start
Start torque com-
pensation Sets start torque compensation 200.0
C4-04 (reverse rotation) with the motors rated torque as to 0.0 0.0 A 7-9
100%
100%.
R TorqCmp@ Start
8 - 13
User Constants
* When the control method is changed, the Inverter reverts to factory settings. (The open loop vector control factory settings will
be displayed.)
ASR proportional
(P) gain 1 Sets the proportional gain of the speed 0.00 to 6 - 36
C5-01
C5 01 20.00 * f B B
loop (ASR.)
(ASR ) 300 00
300.00 6 - 44
ASR P Gain 1
ASR integral (I)
time 1 Sets the integral time of the speed loop 0.000 to 6 - 36
C5-02
C5 02 0.500 * f B B
(ASR) in 11-second
second units
units. 10 000
10.000 6 - 44
ASR I Time 1
:Usually setting is not necessary.
ASR proportional Set to change the rotational speed gain.
(P) gain 2
0.00 to 6 - 36
C5-03
C5 03 For flux vector control 20.00 * f B B
P, I P=C5-01
P C 01 300 00
300.00 6 - 44
I=C5-02
ASR P Gain 2
8 delay time from the speed loop to the torque com- 0.000 to
C5-06
C5 06 mand output,
output in units of 1-second.
1-second 0.004 * A 6 - 37
0 500
0.500
ASR Delay Time :Usually setting is not necessary.
ASR switching Sets the frequency for switching between
frequency Proportion Gain 1, 2 and Integral Time 1,
2 in Hz units
units. 0.0 to
C5 07
C5-07 400.0 00
0.0 A 6 - 36
ASR Gain SW :The multi-function input ASR Gain
Freq SW takes priority.
ASR integral (I) Set to a small value to prevent any radi-
C5-08
C5 08 limit cal load change. Set to 100% of the max- 0 to 400 400 A
ASR I Limit imum output frequency.
* When the control method is changed, the Inverter reverts to factory settings. (The open loop vector control factory settings will
be displayed.)
8 - 14
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Carrier Frequency: C6
Con
Con- Name Change Control Methods
stant Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Num- Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector
ber PG Vector
* 1. The setting range and the factory setting of the Inverter will differ depending on its capacity and control method. (The value
for the 200 V class 0.4 kW Inverter in open loop vector control mode will be displayed.) (See page 8 - 47.)
* 2. For a 400 V Inverter, if the carrier frequency is set to a value higher than the factory setting, the Inverter overload OL2 detec-
tion value will decrease.
J Hunting Prevention: C7
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Hunting prevention
selection :The hunting prevention func-
tion is used to stop a motor un-
der a light load from hunting.
C7-01
C7 01 This function is exclusively for 0, 1 1 A A 7 - 13
the V/f control mode.
When greater responsiveness
Hunt Prev Select than oscillation control is re-
quired, set hunting prevention 8
to disabled.
Sets the ratio for hunting preven-
tion gain.
Hunting prevention :Usually setting is not necessary.
gain Adjust in the following circum-
stances:
S When oscillation occurs due to
C7-02
C7 02 a light load, increase the set val
val- 0.00 to 1.00 A A 7 - 14
ues. 2 50
2.50
S When the motor is stalled, de-
crease the set values.
Hunt Prev Gain
If the set values become too large,
the motor may stall as a result of
non-controlled current.
8 - 15
User Constants
8.2.2 Autotuning Constants: C
J Factory Tuning: C8
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
8 - 16
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Preset Reference: d1
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
J Reference Limits: d2
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
8 - 17
User Constants
8.2.3 Reference Constants: d
J Jump Frequencies: d3
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
8 - 18
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Torque Control: d5
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
8 - 19
User Constants
8.2.4 Motor Constant Constants: E
* 1. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for the 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 2. When the control method is changed, the Inverter reverts to factory settings. (The open loop vector control factory settings will
be displayed.)
* 3. E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
* 4. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
8 - 20
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Motor Setup: E2
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW will be displayed. See
page 8 - 47.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverters rated output current. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW will
be displayed.
8 - 21
User Constants
8.2.4 Motor Constant Constants: E
Motor 2 max.
output frequen- 40.0 to
E4-01 cy 400.0 60.0 A A A A 6 - 26
V/F2 Max Freq
Motor 2 max.
voltage 0.0 to
255 0
255.0 200
E4 02
E4-02 *1
A A A A 6 - 26
V/F2 Max Volt- Output voltage (V) *1
age VMAX
(E4-02)
Motor 2 max.
voltage fre-
E4-03
E4 03 quency 0.0 to 60.0 A A A A 6 - 26
400 0
400.0
V/F2 Base VC
Freq (E4-05)
(E4 05)
Motor 2 mid. Fre-
VMIN quency
output frequen- (E4-07) 0.0 to 3.0
E4-04 (Hz) A A A 6 - 26
cy 1 400.0 *2
2
FMIN FB FA FMAX
V/F2 Mid Freq ((E4-06)) ((E4-04)) ((E4-03)) ((E4-01))
Motor 2 mid.
output frequen- :To set V/f characteristics in a straight 0.0 to
cy voltage 1 line, set the same values for E4-04 11.0
E4-05
E4 05 255.0 A A A 6 - 26
and E4
E4-06.
06 In this case
case, the setting for *1
V/F2 Mid Volt- *1
E4-05 will be disregarded.z
age Always ensure that the four frequen-
* 1. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for the 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 2. When the control method is changed, the Inverter reverts to factory settings. (The open-loop vector control factory settings
will be displayed.)
8 - 22
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Motor 2 Setup: E5
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW will be displayed. See
page 8 - 47.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverters rated output current. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW will
be displayed.
8
* 3. The setting range is 0.00 A to the motors rated current 0.1 A.
8 - 23
User Constants
8.2.5 Options Constants: F
J PG Option Setup: F1
Con
Con- Name Change Control Methods
stant Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Num- Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector
ber PG Vector
8 - 24
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
8 - 25
User Constants
8.2.5 Options Constants: F
8 - 26
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
8 - 27
User Constants
8.2.6 Terminal Constants: H
J Multi-function Inputs: H1
Multi-function input 1
H1-01 Terminal 3 Sel 0 to 77 24 B B B B 7 - 65
(terminal 3)
Multi-function input 2
H1-02 Terminal 4 Sel 0 to 77 14 B B B B 7 - 65
(terminal 4)
Multi-function input 3
H1-03 Terminal 5 Sel 0 to 77 3 (0) * B B B B 7 - 65
(terminal 5)
Multi-function input 4
H1-04 Terminal 6 Sel 0 to 77 4 (3) * B B B B 7 - 65
(terminal 6)
Multi-function input 5
H1-05 Terminal 7 Sel 0 to 77 6 (4) * B B B B 7 - 65
(terminal 7)
Multi-function input 6
H1-06 Terminal 8 Sel 0 to 77 8 (6) * B B B B 7 - 65
(terminal 8)
* The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
Multi-function Input Functions
Control Methods
Setting V/f
Value Function Open
Flux Page
V/f w/ loop
Vector vector
PG
0 3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse run command) f f f f 6 - 14
1 Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: Constant setting) f f f f 7 - 65
2 Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option card) f f f f 7 - 65
Multi-step speed reference 1
3 f f f f 6 - 14
When H3-05 is set to 0, this function is combined with Master/auxiliary speed switch.
4 Multi-step speed reference 2 f f f f 6 - 14
5 Multi-step speed reference 3 f f f f 6 - 14
6 Jog frequency reference (higher priority than multi-step speed reference) f f f f 6 - 14
7 Accel/Decel time 1 f f f f 6 - 17
8 External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON) f f f f 7 - 66
9 External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF) 7 - 66
8
f f f f
A Accel/Decel ramp hold (ON: Accel/decel stopped, frequency on hold) f f f f 7 - 66
B OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be displayed) f f f f 7 - 67
C Multi-function analog input selection (ON: Enable) f f f f 7 - 67
D No V/f control with PG (ON: Speed feedback control disabled,) (normal V/f control) f 7 - 67
E Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control disabled) f f 7 - 67
F Not used (Set when the terminals are not used)
10 Up command (Always set with the down command) f f f f 7 - 68
11 Down command (Always set with the up command) f f f f 7 - 68
12 FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-09) f f f f 6 - 17
13 RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-09) f f f f 6 - 17
14 Fault reset (Reset when turned ON) f f f f 7 - 69
Emergency stop. (Normally open condition: Deceleration to stop in emergency stop time
15 f f f f 6 - 17
C1-09 when ON.)
16 Motor switch command (Motor 2 selection) f f 7 - 69
Emergency stop (Normally closed condition: Deceleration to stop in emergency stop time
17 f f 7 - 69
C1-09 when OFF)
Timer function input (Functions are set with b4-01, b4-02 and the timer function is set at the
18 f f f f 7 - 45
same time)
19 PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled) f f f f 7 - 70
8 - 28
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
Control Methods
Setting V/f
Value Function Open
Flux Page
V/f w/ loop
Vector vector
PG
1A Accel/Decel time 2 f f f f 6 - 17
Constants write enable (ON: All constants can be written-in. OFF: All constants other than
1B f f f f 7 - 70
frequency monitor are write protected.)
1C Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequencies are added to analog frequency references.) f f f f 7 - 70
Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequencies are subtracted from analog frequency refer-
1D f f f f 7 - 70
ences.)
1E Analog frequency reference sample/hold f f f f 7 - 71
Frequency reference terminal 13/14 selection (ON: selects terminal 14) * Enabled only when
1F f f f f 6 - 17
H3-09=1F.
External fault (Desired settings possible)
20 to 2F Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation f f f f 7 - 71
Stopping method: Deceleration to stop, coast to stop, emergency stop or continue operation.
30 PID control integral reset (ON: Reset) f f f f
31 PID control integral hold (ON: Hold) f f f f
60 DC injection braking command (ON: Performs DC injection braking) f f f f 7 - 74
61 External speed search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency) f f 7 - 74
62 External speed search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency) f f 7 - 74
63 Energy-saving command (ON: Energy-saving control set for b8-01, b8-02) f f 7 - 13
64 External speed search command 3 f f f f
65 KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact) f f f f
66 KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact) f f f f
71 Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control) f 7 - 74
72 Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo) f 7 - 75
77 Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (ON: C5-03) f 7 - 75
8 - 29
User Constants
8.2.6 Terminal Constants: H
J Multi-function Outputs: H2
Change Control Methods
Constant
C Name Display Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
Multi-function input
H2-01 Terminal 9 Sel 0 to 37 0 B B B B 7 - 77
(terminal 9-10)
Multi-function input
H2-02 Terminal 25 Sel 0 to 37 1 B B B B 7 - 77
(terminal 25-27)
Multi-function input
H2-03 Terminal 26 Sel 0 to 37 2 B B B B 7 - 77
(terminal 26-27)
8 - 30
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Analog Inputs: H3
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
8 - 31
User Constants
8.2.6 Terminal Constants: H
8 13
Torque reference/torque limit at
speed control
Motors rated torque f 7 - 27
8 - 32
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Analog Outputs: H4
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
AO Level Select
:The optional Analog Monitor
Card may also be used with this 8
setting.
J MEMOBUS Communications: H5
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
Station address
H5 01
H5-01 Set the Inverters node address.
address 0 to 20 1F A A A A
Serial Comm Adr
Set the baud rate for 6CN ME-
MOBUS communications.
Communication 0: 1200 bps
p
H5-02 speed selection 1: 2400 bps 0 to 4 3 A A A A
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
Serial Com Sel 4: 19200 bps
8 - 33
User Constants
8.2.6 Terminal Constants: H
8 - 34
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Motor Overload: L1
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
L2-01
L2 01
for L2-02. When L2-02 is ex-
ceeded, undervoltage fault
0 to 2 0 B B B B 7 - 85
8
detection )
detection.)
2: Enabled while CPU is operat-
ing. (Restarts when power re-
PwrL Selection turns during control opera-
tions. Does not detect under-
voltage fault.
Momentary power Sets the recovery time, when mo-
loss ridethru time mentary power loss selection 0.0 to 0.7
L2-02
L2 02 B B B B 7 - 85
(L2 01) is set to 11, in units of one
(L2-01) 20
2.0 *1
PwrL Ridethru t second.
Sets the Inverters minimum base-
block time in units of one second,
Min. baseblock time when the Inverter is restarted after
power loss ridethrough.
:Sets the time for the motor
motorss re- 0.1 to 0.5
L2 03
L2-03 5.0 B B B B 7 - 86
sidual voltage to dissipate. *1
When an overcurrent occurs
PwrL Baseblock t when starting a speed search or
DC injection braking, increase
the set values.
8 - 35
User Constants
8.2.7 Protection Constants: L
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW will be displayed. See
page 8 - 47.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Value for a 400 V class Inverter is double.
8 - 36
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Stall Prevention: L3
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
8 - 37
User Constants
8.2.7 Protection Constants: L
8 - 38
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Reference Detection: L4
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
8 - 39
User Constants
8.2.7 Protection Constants: L
J Torque Detection: L6
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
J Torque Limit: L7
Con
Con- Name Change Control Modes
stant Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Num- Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector
ber Vector
8
PG
Forward torque
limit 7-4
L7-01
L7 01 0 to 300 200 B B
7 - 30
Torq Limit Fwd
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage
Reverse torque of the motor rated torque.
limit 7-4
L7-02
L7 02 Four individual regions can be set. 0 to 300 200 B B
Output torque 7 - 30
Torq Limit Rev Forward side
Forward regen- L7-01
erative torque L7-04
Reverse
Motor 7-4
L7-03
L7 03 limit Regenera-
speed 0 to 300 200 B B
Re
tive state 7 - 30
Torq Lmt Fwd Regenera-
rward
Rgn e sstate
tive ae
Forw
8 - 40
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Hardware Protection: L8
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
8 - 41
User Constants
8.2.7 Protection Constants: L
* Reduce the carrier frequency selection (C6-01) to 2 kHz when operating continuously at low speeds with
heavy loads when using flux vector control.
8 - 42
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
J Monitor Select: o1
Con
Con- Name Change Control Methods
stant Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Num- Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector
ber PG Vector
8 - 43
User Constants
8.2.8 Operator Constants: o
J Multi-function Selections: o2
Name Change Control Methods
Constant
C Description Setting
S Factory during V/f Open Page
Number Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Flux
tion Vector Vector
PG
Sets the Digital Operator Local/
LOCAL/REMOTE key Remote Key
enable/disable
0: Disabled
o2-01
o2 01 0, 1 1 B B B B 7 - 98
1 E
1: Enabled
bl d (Switches
(S i h between
b
Local/remote key the Digital Operator and the
constant settings.)
Sets the Stop Key in the run
STOP key during mode.
control circuit terminal 0: Disabled (When the run com-
operation mand is issued from and exter-
o2-02 0, 1 1 B B B B 7 - 99
nal terminal, the Stop Key is
disabled.)
Oper STOP Key 1: Enabled (Effective even dur-
ing run.)
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
User constant initial
1: Begins storing (Records the
value
set constants as user initial val-
ues.)
o2-03
o2 03 2: All clear (Clears all recorded 0 to 2 0 B B B B 7 - 99
user initial values)
:When the set constants are re-
User Defaults corded as user initial values,
1110 will be displayed in the
Initialize mode (A1-03.)
kVA selection 0 to FF
o2-04 Do not set.
set 0* B B B B 7 - 99
Inverter Model # *
When the frequency reference is
set on the Digital Operator fre-
Frequency reference quency reference monitor, sets
setting method selec- whether the Enter Key is neces-
tion sary.
o2-05 0: Enter Key needed 0, 1 0 A A A A 7 - 99
1: Enter Key not needed
Operator M.O.P. :When set to 1, the Inverter ac-
cepts the frequency reference
without Enter Key operation.
8 Operation selection
Sets the operation when the Digi-
tal Operator is disconnected.
when digital operator 0: Disabled (Operation continues
is disconnected even if the Digital Operator is
o2-06 disconnected.) 0, 1 0 A A A A 7 - 100
1: Enabled
bl d (OPR
( is
i detected
d d at
Digital Operator disconnec-
Oper Detection tion. Inverter output is cut off,
and fault contact is operated.)
Cumulative operation Sets the cumulative operation time
time setting in hour units. 0 to
o2-07
o2 07 65535 0 A A A A 7 - 100
:O ti time
:Operation ti isi calculated
l l t d
Elapsed Time Set from the set values.
0: Cumulative time when the In-
Cumulative operation verter power is on. (All time
time selection while the Inverter power is on
o2-08
o2 08 iss accu
accumulated.)
u ated.) 0, 1 0 A A A A 7 - 100
1: Cumulative Inverter run time.
Elapsed Time Run (Only Inverter output time is
accumulated.)
Initialize mode selec-
o2-09
o2 09 tion Do not set. 0 to 2 0 A A A A
Init Mode Sel
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW will be displayed.
8 - 44
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
8.2.9 Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
Name Factory Setting
Con-
Con
stant Setting Open
Unit V/f Con- V/f with Flux Vec-
Num- Range Loop
Display trol PG tor
ber Vector
A1-02=0 A1-02=1 A1-02=3
A1-02=2
Speed search selection at start
b3 01
b3-01 0 1
0, 1 0 1 0 1
SpfSrch at Start
Speed search operating current
b3 02
b3-02 0 to 200 1% 150 100
SpdSrch Current
Slip compensation gain
C3 01
C3-01 0 0 to 22.5
0.0 5 01
0.1 00
0.0 10
1.0 10
1.0
Slip Comp gain
Slip compensation primary delay time
C3 02
C3-02 0 to 10000 1 msec 2000 200
Slip Comp Time
Torque compensation time constant
C4 02
C4-02 0 to 10000 1 msec 200 *3 200 *3 20
Torq Comp Time
ASR proportional (P) gain 1
C5 01
C5-01 0 00 to 300
0.00 300.00
00 0 01
0.01 0 20
0.20 20 00
20.00
ASR P Gain 1
ASR integral (I) time 1 0.000 to
C5 02
C5-02 10.000 0 001 sec
0.001 0 200
0.200 0 500
0.500
ASR I Time 1
ASR proportional (P) gain 2
C5 03
C5-03 0 00 to 300
0.00 300.00
00 0 01
0.01 0 02
0.02 20 00
20.00
ASR P Gain 2
ASR integral (I) time 2 0.000 to
C5 04
C5-04 10.000 0 001 sec
0.001 0 050
0.050 0 500
0.500
ASR I Time 2
E1 04
E1-04 Max. output frequency
0 0 to 400
0.0 400.00 0 1 Hz
0.1 60 0 *2
60.0 60 0 *2
60.0 60 0
60.0 60 0
60.0
E4-01 Max Frequency
E1 05
E1-05 Max. voltage
0 0 to 255
0.0 255.00 01V
0.1 200 0 *2
200.0 200 0 *2
200.0 200 0
200.0 200 0
200.0
E4-02 Max Voltage
E1 06
E1-06 Max. voltage frequency
0 0 to 400
0.0 400.00 0 1 Hz
0.1 60 0 *2
60.0 60 0 *2
60.0 60 0
60.0 60 0
60.0
E4-03 Max Voltage Frequency
E1 07
E1-07 Mid. output frequency
0 0 to 400
0.0 400.00 0 1 Hz
0.1 3 0 *2
3.0 3 0 *2
3.0 30
3.0 ---
E4-04 Mid Frequency A
E1 08
E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage *1 0.0 to 255.0
01V
0.1 15 0 *2
15.0 15 0 *2
15.0 11 0
11.0 ---
8
E4-05 Mid voltage A (0.0 to 510.0)
E1 09
E1-09 Min. output frequency
0 0 to 400
0.0 400.00 0 1 Hz
0.1 1 5 *2
1.5 1 5 *2
1.5 05
0.5 00
0.0
E4-06 Min Frequency
E1 10
E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage *1 0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0) 01V
0.1 9 0 *2
9.0 9 0 *2
9.0 20
2.0 ---
E4-07 Min Voltage
Overspeed detection delay time
F1 09
F1-09 0 0 to 22.0
0.0 0 0 1 sec
0.1 10
1.0 00
0.0
PG Overspd Time
* 1. The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
* 2. Settings vary as shown in the following tables depending on the Inverter capacity and V/F pattern selection (E1-03).
* 3. The setting will be 1000 msec for 200 V class inverters of 30 kW or larger, or 400 V class inverters of 55 kW or larger.
8 - 45
User Constants
8.2.9 Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
2.2 to 45 kW Inverters
55 to 300 kW Inverters
8 E1-04
E1-05*
Hz
V
50.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
72.0
200.0
50.0
200.0
50.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
50.0
200.0
50.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
90.0
200.0
120.0
200.0
180.0
200.0
60.0
200.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-07* Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
E1-08 V 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 15.0 20.0 15.0 20.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
E1-10* V 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 7.0 11.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
8 - 46
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
8.2.10 Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
Con-
stant Name Unit Factory Setting
Number
Inverter Capacity kW 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
o2-04 kVA selection --- 8 9 A B C D E F
C6-01 Carrier frequency upper limit kHz 15.0 15.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 8
Carrier frequency upper limit
kHz 15.0 15.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
range
C6-02 Carrier frequency lower limit kHz 15.0 15.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
Carrier frequency proportional
C6-03 --- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
gain
E2-01
Motor rated current A 53.0 65.8 77.2 105.0 131.0 160.0 190.0 260.0
(E5-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 1.60 1.67 1.70 1.80 1.33 1.60 1.43 1.39
(E5-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 15.2 15.7 18.5 21.9 38.2 44.0 45.6 72.0
(E5-03)
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance 0.138 0.101 0.079 0.064 0.039 0.030 0.022 0.023
(E5-05)
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 17.2 20.1 19.5 20.8 18.8 20.2 20.5 20.0
(E5-06)
Motor iron loss for torque com-
E2-10 W 272 505 538 699 823 852 960 1200
pensation
Momentary power loss ridethru
L2-02 sec 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
time
8 - 47
User Constants
8.2.10 Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
Con-
stant Name Unit Factory Setting
Number
Inverter Capacity kW 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
o2-04 kVA selection --- 8 9 A B C D E F
L2-03 Min. baseblock time sec 0.7 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
L2-04 Voltage recovery time sec 0.3 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.0
8 - 48
8.2 Programming Mode Constants
Con-
stant Name Unit Factory Setting
Number
Inverter Capacity kW 22 30 37 45 55 75 110 160 185 220 300
o2-04 kVA selection 1 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 32 34 35 36 37
C6-01 Carrier frequency upper limit kHz 10.0 10.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 5.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Carrier frequency upper limit
range
kHz 15.0 15.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 2.5 2.5 2.5
8
C6-02 Carrier frequency lower limit kHz 10.0 10.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 5.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Carrier frequency proportional
C6-03 --- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
gain2
E2-01
Motor rated current A 38.6 52.3 65.6 79.7 95.0 130.0 190.0 270.0 310.0 370.0 500.0
(E5-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 1.70 1.80 1.33 1.60 1.46 1.39 1.40 1.35 1.30 1.30 1.25
(E5-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 9.2 10.9 19.1 22.0 24.0 36.0 49.0 70.0 81.0 96.0 130.0
(E5-03)
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance 0.316 0.269 0.155 0.122 0.088 0.092 0.046 0.029 0.025 0.020 0.014
(E5-05)
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 23.5 20.7 18.8 19.9 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
(E5-06)
E2-10 Motor iron loss for torque com-
W 586 750 925 1125 1260 1600 2150 2850 3200 3700 4700
pensation
Momentary power loss ridethru
L2-02 sec 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
time
L2-03 Min. baseblock time sec 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0
L2-04 Voltage recovery time sec 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
8 - 49
User Constants
8.2.10 Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
* 1. When increasing the carrier frequency upper limit value beyond the factory setting for Inverters larger than 7.5 kW, the Inverter
rated current must be reduced. Contact your Yaskawa representative for further details.
* 2. For v/f control with PG or v/f control without PG with Inverters of 185 to 300 kW, the carrier frequency lower limit (C6-02)
becomes 1.0 and the carrier frequency gain (C6-36) becomes 36.
8 - 50
9
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for the
VS-616G5 and motor problems and countermeasures.
9-1
Troubleshooting
9.1.1 Fault Detection
9-2
9.1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions
9-3
Troubleshooting
9.1.1 Fault Detection
9-4
9.1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions
9-5
Troubleshooting
9.1.2 Minor Fault Detection
9-6
9.1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions
9-7
Troubleshooting
9.1.3 Operation Errors
9-8
9.2 Troubleshooting
9.2 Troubleshooting
Due to constant setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected when
the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to 9.1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions.
J The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are
pressed.
1. Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
D If the constant A1-04 (Password 1) and A1-05 (Password 2) numbers are different, the constants for the
initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
D If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (select password) by pressing the Reset/Select Key
and the Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset
password in constant A1-04.)
2. Constant write enable is input.
D This occurs when constant write enable (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input. If the constant
write enable input is OFF, the constants cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the constants.
3. The Inverter is operating (drive mode).
D There are some constants that cannot be set during operation. Turn the Inverter off and then make the
settings.
J OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
D This is a constant setting error. The set value for the constant is wrong. Refer to 9.1.3 Operation Errors
and correct the setting.
J CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
D This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the
Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.
9.2.2 If the Motor Does Not Operate
J The motor does not operate when the Run Key on the Digital Operator is
pressed.
IMPORTANT If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to display
the operation mode, and enter the drive mode by pressing the Enter Key.
9-9
Troubleshooting
9.2.2 If the Motor Does Not Operate
5. A digital setting was made for frequency reference 2 for multi-step speed operation, but
1F was not set for a multi-function analog input (H3-05).
D The auxiliary frequency reference is treated as frequency reference 2 when the multi-step speed refer-
ences are used and 0 (auxiliary frequency reference) is set for the multi-function analog input (H3-05).
D Make sure that 1F is set for the multi-function analog input (H3-05) and that the setting of frequency
reference 2 is appropriate.
J The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
IMPORTANT If the Inverter is not in operation mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to
display the drive mode, and enter the drive mode by pressing the Enter Key.
9 - 10
9.2 Troubleshooting
1. The frequency reference bias setting is wrong (the gain setting is wrong).
D The frequency reference bias set in constant H3-03 is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure
that the set value is suitable.
2. Frequency bias is set for multi-function analog inputs.
D When 2 (frequency bias) is set for multi-function analog inputs H3-05 and H3-09, a frequency corre-
sponding to the input voltage (current) is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that the set
value and analog input value are suitable.
3. A signal is being input to the frequency reference (current) terminal 14.
D When 1F (frequency reference) is set for constant H3-09 (multi-function analog input terminal 14),
a frequency corresponding to the terminal 14 input voltage (current) is added to the frequency reference.
Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable.
J The motor does not rotate according to reference.
D Torque control mode isselected. When constant d5-01 (torque control selection) isset to 1 (torque con- 9
trol), speed control cannot be executed. (Speed limits can be set.)
To switch torque control and speed control, set the following
Set constant d5-01 to 0 (speed control).
Set one of the constants from H1-01 through H1-06 (multi-function inputs) to 71 (speed/torque
control change).
9.2.6 If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision
D The slip compensation limit has been reached. With the slip compensation function, compensation can-
not be carried out beyond the slip compensation limit set in constant C3-03. Check to be sure that the
set value is suitable.
9.2.7 If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Open-loop
Vector Control Mode
D The motors rated voltage is high.
D The Inverters maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage. (For example, if 200 VAC
is input, then the maximum output voltage will be 200 VAC.) If, as a result of vector control, the output
voltage reference value exceeds the Inverter output voltage maximum value, the speed control accuracy
9 - 11
Troubleshooting
9.2.8 If Motor Deceleration is Slow
will decrease. Set C3-06 to 1, or, alternatively use a motor with a low rated voltage (i.e., a special motor
for use with vector control), or change to flux vector control.
9.2.8 If Motor Deceleration is Slow
9 - 12
9.2 Troubleshooting
9.2.11 If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run
D The Inverter performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause
the ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter
with a high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an oper-
ating time of 0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed
for use with Inverters). It will also help to some extent to lower the Inverters carrier frequency (constant
C6-01).
In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
9.2.12 If There is Mechanical Oscillation
1. There may be resonance between the mechanical systems characteristic frequency and
the carrier frequency.
D If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it
may indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with
constants C6-01 to C6-03.
2. There may be resonance between a machines characteristic frequency and the output fre-
quency of the Inverter.
D To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in constants d3-01 to d3-04 or
install rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation.
J Oscillation and hunting are occurring with open-loop vector control.
D The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants
C4-02 (torque compensation time constant), C8-08 (AFR gain), and C3-02 (slip compensation primary
delay time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.
D Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately
for the motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the control mode
selection (A1-02) to V/f control.
J Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f control.
D The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants
C4-02 (torque compensation time constant), C7-02 (hunting prevention gain), and C3-02 (slip com-
pensation primary delay time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.
J Oscillation and hunting are occurring with flux vector control.
9
D The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the various types of speed control loop (ASR) gain. (For
details, refer to page 6 - 38.)
D If the mechanical systems resonance point coincides with the Inverters operating frequency and the os-
cillationcannotbeeliminatedinthisway,increasetheASRprimarydelaytime(constantC5-06) andthen
try adjusting the gain again.
D Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately
for the motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the control mode
selection (A1-02) to V/f control.
J Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f w/PG control.
D The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the various types of speed control loop (ASR) gain. (For
details, refer to page 6 - 45.)
D If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way, set the hunting prevention selection (constant C7-01)
to 0 (disabled) and then try adjusting the gain again.
J Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PID control.
D Check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust the P, I, and D. (Refer to page 7 - 51.)
9 - 13
Troubleshooting
9.2.13 If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped
9 - 14
10
Maintenance and Inspection
10
10 - 1
Maintenance and Inspection
WARNING
D Do not touch the Inverter terminals. Some of the terminals carry high voltages and are extremely
dangerous.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
D Always have the protective cover in place when power is being supplied to the Inverter. When
attaching the cover, always turn OFF power to the Inverter through the MCCB.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
D After turning OFF the main circuit power supply, wait until the CHARGE indicator light goes out
before performance maintenance or inspections.
The capacitor will remain charged and is dangerous.
D Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized per-
sonnel. Remove all metal objects, such as watches and rings, before starting work. Always use
grounded tools.
Failure to heed these warning can result in electric shock.
CAUTION
D A CMOS IC is used in the control board. Handle the control board and CMOS IC carefully. The
CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
D Do not change the wiring, or remove connectors or the Digital Operator, during operation.
Doing so can result in personal injury.
10
10 - 2
10.1 Maintenance and Inspection
10 - 3
11
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the VS-616G5 and specifi-
cations for options and peripheral devices.
11
11 - 1
Specifications
Voltage (V)
3-phase, 200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Frequency (Hz)
pply charact
Allowable voltage
+10%, 15%
fluctuation
Power sup
Allowable frequency
fluctuation
5%
Frequency control
0.1 to 400 Hz
range
ntrol ccharac
11
11 - 2
11.1 Standard Inverter Specifications
Model number
20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075
CIMR-G5A
Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Instantaneous over-
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
current protection
Fuse blown protec-
Stops for fuse blown.
tion
Overload protection Stops in one minute at approx. 150% of rated output current.
ive funcctions
Overvoltage protec-
Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 406 V.
tion
Undervoltage protec-
Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 190 V.
tion
Protectiv
Momentary power
Stops for 15 ms or more. By selecting the momentary power loss mode, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
loss ridethru
Pr
humidity
E ronme
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and
Inverter, be sure that the Inverters rated current is applicable for the motors rated current.
* 2. Tuning is sometimes required.
Table 11.2 400 V Class Inverters
Model number 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P7 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045 4055 4075 4110 4160 4185 4220 4300
CIMR-G5A
Max. applicable motor
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 110 160 185 220 300
output (kW)
Rated output capac-
1.4 2.6 3.7 4.7 6.1 11 14 21 26 31 37 50 61 73 98 130 170 230 260 340 460
ity (kVA)
Rated output current
1.8 3.4 4.8 6.2 8 14 18 27 34 41 48 65 80 96 128 165 224 302 340 450 605
(A)
ngs
put rating
Voltage (V)
3-phase, 380 to 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Frequency (Hz)
upply charact
Allowable voltage
+ 10%, 15%
fluctuation
Power sup
Allowable frequency
fluctuation
5%
11
11 - 3
Specifications
Model number
40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P7 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045 4055 4075 4110 4160 4185 4220 4300
CIMR-G5A
Control method Sine wave PWM
Torque characteris-
150% at 1 Hz (150% at 0 r/min with PG).
tics
Speed control range 1: 100 (1: 1000 with PG)*2
Speed control accu-
racy
0.2% (25 C 10 C) (0.02% with PG)*2
Frequency control
0.1 to 400 Hz
range
charac
(temperature charac-
charac
teristics) Analog references: 0.1% (25 C 10 C)
Cont
Overvoltage protec-
Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 812 V.
tion
Undervoltage protec-
Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 380 V.
tion
Protectiv
Momentary power
Stops for 15 ms or more. By selecting the momentary power loss mode, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
loss ridethru
Pr
humidity
E ronme
11 * 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and
Inverter, be sure that the Inverters rated current is applicable for the motors rated current.
* 2. Tuning is sometimes required.
11 - 4
11.2 Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
* 1. Use a ground fault interrupter with a current sensitivity of 200 mA minimum and an operating time of 0.1 s minimum to prevent
operating errors. The interrupter must be suitable for high-frequency operation.
* 2. The suffixes of the model and code numbers of VS Operators indicate frequency meters are shown in the following table.
11 - 5
Specifications
11 - 6
11.2 Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
S Differential input.
S A-phase pulse (differential pulse) input, for V/f control
S Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
PG-D2 73600-A014X TOE-C736-40.3
S Input: Conforms to RS-422
S Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
Used for flux vector control.
S A-, B-, Z-phase pulse (differential pulse) input
S Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
PG-X2 73600-A015X TOE-C736-40.4
S Input: Conforms to RS-422
S Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
Synchronous Phase Control Connector to Inverter to enable synchronized startup control with
Card 73600-A016X the motor. An external voltage detection transformer TOE-C736-40.5
SP-A2 (CPT005845) is required.
11
11 - 7
12
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral
devices and also provides lists of constants.
12
12 - 1
Appendix
12.1.1 Selection
J Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity
power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a phase capacitor. Excessive peak current can de-
stroy the convertor section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the power supply
power factor.
DC reactors are built into 200 V class Inverters of 18.5 to 75 kW and 400 V class Inverters of 18.5 to 160 kW.
If a thyrister convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
4000 DC or AC reactor
Power Required
supply
capacity DC or AC reactor
600
(kVA) Not required
0 60 400
Inverter capacity (kVA)
J Inverter Capacity
When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter, select the Inverter capacity so
that the rated output current of the Inverter is 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.
J Initial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the
Inverter that is driving the motor. The torque characteristics are generally less than those required when start-
ing using a normal commercial power supply. If a large initial torque is required, select an Inverter with a
somewhat larger capacity or increase the capacity of both the motor and the inverter.
J Emergency Stop
Although the Inverters protective functions will stop operation when a fault occurs, the motor will not stop
immediately. Always provide mechanical stop and protection mechanisms on equipment requiring an emer-
gency stop.
J Options
Terminals B1, B2, , 1, 2, 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by Yaskawa.
Never connect any other devices to these terminals.
12.1.2 Installation
J Installation in Enclosures
Either install the Inverter in a clean location not subject to oil mist, air-bourne matter, dust, and other contami-
nants, or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel
space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature. Do not
install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.
J Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other horizontal surface.
12
12 - 2
12.1
Inverter Application Precautions
12.1.3 Settings
J Upper Limits
The Digital Operator can be used to set high-speed operation up to a maximum of 400 Hz. Incorrect settings
can be dangerous. Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set upper limits. (The maximum output
frequency is factory-set to 60 Hz.)
J DC Injection Braking
The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking voltage or braking time is set to a large value.
J Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motors acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the
load torque, and the loads inertial moment (GD2/4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during
accelerationordeceleration,increasetheaccelerationordecelerationtime.Thestallpreventionfunctionswill
increase the acceleration or deceleration time by the amount of time the stall prevention function is active.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
12.1.4 Handling
J Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and sequences carefully.
J Magnetic Contactor Installation
Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Do-
ing so can cause the Inverter to malfunction.
J Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 55 kW or
highter)
If the jumper is inserted into a power tap that does not match the actual power supply voltage, the lifetime
of the transformer for the power supply or the wind capacity of the cooling fan may be reduced.
If the jumper is inserted and the voltage setting is too low for the actual power supply, a power surge may
occur on the transformer for the power supply and reduce the lifetime of the transformer.
If the jumper is inserted and the voltage setting is too high for the actual power supply, the wind capacity of
the cooling fan is reduced.
Insert the jumper into the power tap with the voltage setting nearest to the voltage of the actual power supply.
Refer to chapter 4 Trial operation for the procedure.
J Inspections
The internal capacitors in the Inverter require time to discharge after the power supply is turned OFF. Do not
start inspections until the CHARGE indicator goes out.
J Wiring UL/C-UL Inverters
Always use closed-loop connectors when wiring Inverters that meet UL or C-UL standards. Always use the
crimp tool specified by the manufacturer of the closed-loop connectors.
12
12 - 3
Appendix
12.2.1Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
Frequency (Hz)
If the input voltage is high (440 V or higher) or the wiring distance is long, the motor insulation voltage must
be considered. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
J High-speed Operation
When using the motor at a high speed (60 Hz or more), problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing
durability. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
J Torque Characteristics
The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than when op-
erated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with
the motor to set a proper V/f pattern.
J Vibration
The Inverter uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration. When the motor is operated with the Invert-
er, motor vibration is almost the same as when operated with a commercial power supply.
Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.
Imbalanced Rotor
Take special care when the motor is operated at a higher speed (60 Hz or more).
J Noise
Noise is almost the same as when the motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise, how-
ever, becomes louder when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed (60 Hz).
12
12 - 4
12.2
Motor Application Precautions
J Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore, an
appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used.
Before changing the number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped. Otherwise, the overvol-
tage protective or overcurrent protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.
J Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors ishigher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select
an Inverter by checking its rated output current.
When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use a cable thick enough to connect the motor and
Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.
J Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor or increased safety-type motor is to be used, it must be subject to an explo-
sion-proof test in conjunction with the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof mo-
tor is to be operated with the Inverter.
Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
J Gearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufactur-
er. In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning.
If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz, consult with the manufacturer.
J Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control.
If a group of synchronous motors is individually turned ON and OFF, synchronism may be lost.
J Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.
12.2.3 Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)
If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication
will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism
will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed
higher than 60 Hz.
12
12 - 5
Appendix
12
12 - 6
12.3 Peripheral Device Application Precautions
2 k
15 Speed setting power supply
+15 V 20 mA
3 0 to +10 V 13 Master speed reference
2k
External 2 0 to 10 V (20 k)
1 4 to 20 mA P
frequency 14 Master speed reference
reference 0 to +10 V P 4 to 20 mA (250 )
16
Multi-function analog input
P
0V 17 0 to 10 V (20 k)
0V
12
12 - 7
Appendix
12.4.1 Using a Braking Resistor Unit
MCCB
1 2 B1 B2
3-phase power MC
R Motor
200 to 230 V R (L1) U (T1)
50/60 Hz V (T2)
S S (L2) IM
or
380 to 460 V T T (L3) W (T3)
50/60 Hz *1 400/200 V VS-616G5
THRX OFF ON MC
MC
SA (200 V class Inverters: Ground
Overload relay trip contact to 100 max., 400 V class In-
of Braking Resistor Unit
THRX verters: Ground to 10 max.)
1 2
SA
MC TRX
* 1 A transformer is not required for 200 V class Inverters.
SA
* 2 Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from between terminals
TRX 1 and 2 when connecting a DC Reactor (Optional).
* 3 Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to 0 when us-
20 18
Fault contacts ing a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration
time if this setting is not changed.
0 P
MCCB 1 2 3
MC
R R (L1) U (T1) Motor
3-phase power
200 to 230 V S S (L2) V (T2) IM
50/60 Hz
T T (L3) W (T3)
VS-616G5
THRX OFF ON MC
MC
SA
Overload relay trip contact (Ground to 100 max.)
of Braking Resistor Unit
THRX
1 2
SA
MC TRX
12 Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
Forward run command
(forward run when closed)
Reverse run command
Braking Unit (reverse run when closed)
External fault 3 4
3
12 - 8
12.4 Wiring Examples
0 P
A sequence is required to turn
OFF the power supply for the
thermal overload relay trip con- Braking Unit 0 B
tacts of the Braking Resistor Unit. (Optional)
Level
detector 1 2
MCCB 1 2 3
MC
R R U Motor
3-phase power
200 to 230 V S S V IM
50/60 Hz
T T W
Cooling fan
r
M
THRX OFF ON MC
MC
SA
VS-616G5
Overload relay trip contact
of Braking Resistor Unit (Ground to 100 max.)
THRX
1 2
SA
MC
TRX
SA
TRX
20 18
Fault contacts 18
Fault contact
Forward Run/Stop 19 output
Forward run command
Reverse Run/Stop (forward run when closed) 20
Reverse run command
Braking Unit (reverse run when closed)
3 4
External fault
3
:Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to 0 when using a Braking
Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not
changed.
12
12 - 9
Appendix
12.4.2 Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit
0 P
MCCB 1 2 3
MC
R R U Motor
3-phase power
380 to 460 V S S V IM
50/60 Hz
T T W
400/200 V r Cooling fan
Voltage
M
ON setting
THRX OFF MC
460/440/415/
MC 400/380V
SA
Overload relay trip contact
(Ground to 10 max.)
of Braking Resistor Unit
THRX VS-616G5
1 2
SA
MC
TRX
SA
TRX
20 18
Fault contacts 18
Fault contact
Forward Run/Stop Forward run command 19 output
(forward run when closed) 20
Reverse Run/Stop
Reverse run command
(reverse run when closed)
Braking Unit
3 4
External fault
3
:Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to 0 when using a Braking
Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not
changed.
12
12 - 10
12.4 Wiring Examples
Level
SLAVE SLAVE
1 +15 5 1 5
Braking Unit 2
P
2 6 2 6
3 4 3 4
Thermal switch Thermal switch
3
MCCB
MC
R R U Motor
3-phase power VS-616G5
200 to 230 V S S V IM
50/60 Hz
T T W
r Cooling fan
M
THRX OFF ON MC
MC
SA
Overload relay trip contact of (Ground to 100 max.)
Braking Resistor Unit
THRX
1 2
SA
MC TRX
SA
TRX
20 18
Fault contacts
18
Forward Run/Stop Forward run command 19 Fault contact
(forward run when closed)
Reverse Run/Stop 20 output
Reverse run command
(reverse run when closed)
Braking Unit
External fault 3 4
3
:Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to 0 when using a Braking
Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not
changed.
12
12 - 11
Appendix
12.4.4 Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel
12.4.4 Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel
Level
SLAVE Braking Unit
1 +15 5
2 6
3 4
Thermal switch
MCCB 3
MC
Motor
R R U
3-phase power VS-616G5
380 to 460 V S S V IM
50/60 Hz
T T W
400/200V Cooling fan
r
Voltage M
setting
THRX OFF ON MC
400
MC 460/440/415/
SA 400/380V
Overload relay trip contact of (Ground to 10 max.)
Braking Resistor Unit
THRX
1 2
SA
MC TRX
SA
TRX
18
20 18 Fault contact
Fault contacts 19 output
Forward Run/Stop 1
Forward run command 20
(forward run when closed)
Reverse Run/Stop 2
Reverse run command
Braking Unit (reverse run when closed)
External fault 3 4
3
:Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to 0 when using a Braking
Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not
changed.
12
12 - 12
12.4 Wiring Examples
Short-circuit bar
(Standard)
MCCB 1 2 B1 B2
8
11 11 Sequence common (0 V)
12 Shield terminal
15
15 Speed setting power (15 V, 20 mA)
FREQ SET 13
13 Master speed reference
(0 to 10 V, 20 k)
14 Master speed reference
P P (4 to 20 mA, 250 )
16 Multi-function analog input
17 (0 to 10 V, 20 k)
17
0V
33 Speed setting power (15 V, 20 mA)
SOURCE
9 9
Multi-function contact
RUN 10 10 output
(Default: Running signal)
FAULT 18 P 18
19
Fault contact output
25 Open collector 1
20
(Default: Zero speed
signal)
Multi-function
23 Multi-function 26 Open collector 2 open-collector
MTR CAL analog output (Default: Speed agree output
Frequency meter
F1 signal) 48 V , 50 mA max.
FM 21 Multi-function ana-
log output (Default: 27
P Output frequency) Multi-function output
common
F3 22
12
12 - 13
Appendix
12.4.6 Using an Open-collector Transistor for Operation Signals
12 Shield terminal
Sequencer
Surge
absorber
18
10
48 VDC max
Flywheel diode
25
Open collector 1 48 VDC max
(Default: Zero
Flywheel diode
speed)
26 48 V, 50 mA max.
Open collector 2
(Default: Speed
agree)
27 48 V, 50 mA max.
Multi-function output
common
12
12 - 14
12.5 User Constants
A2-01
User setting constant PID feedback command loss detection level
to (User Pram 1 to 32)
b5-13 (Fb los Det Lvl)
0
A2-32
Reference selection PID feedback command loss detection time
b1-01 (Reference Source)
1 b5-14 (Fb los Det Time)
1.0
12 - 15
Appendix
ASR proportional (P) gain 1 20.00 Frequency reference hold function selection
C5-01 (ASR P Gain 1) :1 d4-01 (MOP Ref Memory)
0
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time :2 Mid. output frequency 3.0
C8-09 (AFR Time)
50 E1-07 (Mid. Frequency A) :1
12 - 16
12.5 User Constants
Mid. output frequency voltage 2:2 Integral value during accel/decel enable/disable
E1-12 Mid Voltage B)
0.0 F1-07 (PG Ramp PI/I Sel)
0
Motor no-load current 1.20 Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
E2-03 (No-Load Current) :3 F1-11 (PG Deviate Time)
0.5
Motor 2 no-load current:1 1.20 External fault detection from transmission op-
E5-03 (Motor 2 No-load I) :3 F9-02 tion (EF0 Detection):1
0
Motor 2 number of poles:1 Action for external fault from transmission op-
E5-04 (Motor 2 # poles)
4 poles F9-03 tion (EF0 Fault Act):1
1
F1-05
PG rotation
(PG Rotation Sel)
0 H1-04
Multi-function input (terminal 6)
(Terminal 6 Sel)
4 (3)
:5 12
* 1. Not displayed for some models depending on software version No.
* 2. Setting for 200 V class Inverters. For 400 V class Inverters, double the value.
* 3. Setting unit and initial setting depend on Inverter capacity.
* 4. Depends on the control method (A1-02).
* 5. Factory setting in the parentheses is for 3-wire sequence.
12 - 17
Appendix
Multi-function input (terminal 8) 8 (6) Momentary power loss ridethru time 0.7
H1-06 (Terminal 8 Sel) :5 L2-02 (PwrL Ridethru t) :2
Signal level selection (terminal 16) Stall prevention limit during accel
H3-04 (Term 16 Signal)
0 L3-03 (StallP CHP Lvl)
50
Multi-function analog input (terminal 16) Stall prevention selection during decel
H3-05 (Terminal 16 Sel)
0 L3-04 (StallP Decel Sel)
1
Analog input filter time constant Operation when frequency reference is missing
H3-12 (Filter Avg Time)
0.00 L4-05 (Ref Loss Sel)
0
12 - 18
12.5 User Constants
OL2 characteristics selection for low speeds Frequency reference setting method:1
L8-19 (OL2 Chara@ L-Spd)
0 o2-05 (Operator M.O.P.)
0
12
12 - 19
12
Appendix
Automatically selected
depending on the type of Transmission option
Optical Card to be mounted. other than SI-K2
Transmission option
other than SI-K2 SI-K2 option RUN command
Control circuit terminal
(Terminals 1 and 2)
(see note 2)
(Option) Digital Operator (see note 2)
C-connector Multi-function input (01)
F3-01 Frequency reference (Local/remote selection)
setting setting mode
Set the multi-function input to 01.
BCD 1% unit
BCD 0.1% unit LOCAL (Operator)
BCD 0.01% unit
When frequency
BCD 1 Hz unit reference is Optional Card provided
disabled
BCD 0.1 Hz unit at the Cconnector
BCD 0.01 Hz unit Multi-function input
BCD 5-digit input/0.01 Hz unit (Option selected)
Multi-step speed reference
(Option) Binary
SI-K2 option (see note 2) (see note 2)
C-connector DI-08: 255/100%
DI-18H (12-bit selected):
4095/100% When the frequency
reference is set to
DI-18H (16-bit selected):
DI-01 to DI-08, frequency
30000/100% Multi-function gain and frequency bias
input (=C) are invalid.
Multi-function input 1000/1 Hz
Frequency
Closed or Jump reference:
not selected frequency Fref
processi-
AI-14B ing
13 bits
Open
When frequency
reference is
disabled
12.6 Function Block Diagram
12 - 20
(Option)
C-connector
H3-06 (Terminal 16)
H3-09 (Terminal 14)
Multi-function input
Closed
Not selected
Open
J A1 Detailed Block Diagram
12 - 21
Primary delay
filter
(see note)
Primary delay
filter
12.6 Function Block Diagram
12
Index
A closed-loop connectors
control circuit, 3 - 31
AC Reactor, 3 - 14 main circuit, 3 - 7
C dwell function, 7 - 52
cables, length, 3 - 16
CALL (serial communications call), 9 - 7
E
carrier frequency, 7 - 56 E-15 (Si-F/G communications error), 9 - 7
Index- 1
Index
Index- 2
Index
Index- 3
Index
P R
radio noise, countermeasures, 3 - 16
password, 4 - 23
rated current
PF (input phase loss), 9 - 3 V/f control, 6 - 21
PG V/f control with PG, 6 - 40
constant, flux vector control, 6 - 28
reference source, 6 - 4
disconnection stopping method
flux vector control, 6 - 29 reverse operation, 6 - 11
V/f control with PG, 6 - 43 RH (dynamic brake resistor), 9 - 3
flux vector control, 6 - 28
RR (dynamic brake transistor), 9 - 3
gear teeth, V/f control with PG, 6 - 42
pulse number, V/f control with PG, 6 - 42 run, 6 - 9
pulse output monitor division rate, flux vector control, command, 6 - 9
6 - 29 source, 6 - 9
rotation direction, flux vector control, 6 - 28
speed deviation
flux vector control, 6 - 30 S
V/f control with PG, 6 - 43
V/f control with PG, 6 - 42 S-curve characteristic function, 7 - 52
PG disconnection detection, 9 - 4 SC (short circuit), 9 - 2
PG Speed Control Card, 6 - 28, 6 - 42 sequence control, 3-wire, 6 - 14
installing, 3 - 24
sequential operation, 4 - 21
terminal blocks, 3 - 25
wiring, 3 - 31 settings
wiring, 3 - 27 analog output bias (terminal 21), H4-03, 6 - 38, 6 - 45
analog output bias (terminal 23), H4-06, 6 - 38, 6 - 45
PGO (PG open), 9 - 4, 9 - 6
analog output gain (terminal 21), H4-02, 6 - 38, 6 - 45
phase advancing capacitor, 3 - 15 analog output gain (terminal 23), H4-05, 6 - 38, 6 - 45
analog output level selection, H4-07, 6 - 38
PID control function, 1 - 5, 7 - 46
analog output selection (terminal 21), H4-01, 6 - 38,
block diagram, 7 - 48
6 - 45
control operations, 7 - 46
analog output selection (terminal 23), H4-04, 6 - 38,
control settings, 7 - 49
6 - 45
types, 7 - 47
SI-B communications error, 9 - 7
PID disable, 7 - 70
SI-F/G communications error detected, 9 - 7
poles, 6 - 40
number, 6 - 40 slip compensation gain, 7 - 34, 7 - 54
Index- 4
Index
Index- 5
Index
V Z
V/f control, 6 - 21 zero servo fault (SVE), 9 - 4
motor constants, 6 - 21, 7 - 31 zero-servo command, 7 - 75
V/f control with PG, 6 - 40, 7 - 36 zero-servo control, 7 - 19
motor constants, 6 - 40
zero-servo end, 7 - 78
V/f patterns, 1 - 4
zero-servo function
setting, 5 - 8
See zero-servo control
user-defined, setting, 6 - 41
user-defined patterns, setting, 6 - 26 zero-speed, 7 - 78
Index- 6